RADview-EMS/NGN Element Management System for NGN
Applications
ACE-3100, ACE-3200
© 1994–2008 RAD Data Communications Publication 05/08
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 i
Contents
Chapter 1. Introduction
1.1 ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Overview ................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Product Options ......................................................................................................... 1-1
Chassis Options ................................................................................................. 1-1 Interface Options .................................................................................................... 1-1 Power Options ........................................................................................................ 1-2 License Packs .......................................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Overview ..................................................... 1-2 Configuration Operations ........................................................................................ 1-3
Device-Level Configuration ................................................................................. 1-3 Port-Level Configuration ..................................................................................... 1-4 Logical Layer Configuration ................................................................................ 1-4 Application-Level Configuration .......................................................................... 1-5
Performance Monitoring Operations ........................................................................ 1-6 Device-Level Performance Monitoring ................................................................. 1-6 Port-Level Performance Monitoring .................................................................... 1-8 Logical Layer Performance Monitoring ................................................................ 1-8 Application-Level Performance Monitoring .......................................................... 1-9
Fault Detection Operations ................................................................................... 1-10 Device-Level Fault Detection ............................................................................ 1-10 Port-Level Fault Detection ................................................................................ 1-10 Application-Level Fault Detection ..................................................................... 1-11
Chapter 2. Installation and Operation
2.1 Pre-Configuring for Network Management .................................................................. 2-1 2.2 Connecting to the Management Station ..................................................................... 2-1
Using an Out-of-Band LAN Connection .................................................................... 2-1 Using an Inband ATM VC Connection ....................................................................... 2-2 Using an IP-Based or Inband PW Connection ............................................................ 2-2
2.3 Launching RADview ACE-3100, ACE-3200 ................................................................... 2-3 2.4 Using the Graphical User Interface (GUI) ..................................................................... 2-4
Using the Device Level Interface .............................................................................. 2-5 Using the Port Level Interface ................................................................................. 2-6 On-Screen LED Indicators ........................................................................................ 2-8
Chapter 3. Configuration Management
3.1 Setting the System Parameters .................................................................................. 3-1 Entering General System Information ...................................................................... 3-1 Setting the Date and Time ...................................................................................... 3-3
Validating the Date and Time .............................................................................. 3-4 Setting the Summer Time Parameters ................................................................. 3-5
Setting the Manager List ......................................................................................... 3-8 Viewing Current Manager IPs .............................................................................. 3-8 Masking Traps .................................................................................................... 3-9 Adding Managers ............................................................................................. 3-13 Validating Managers ......................................................................................... 3-14 Modifying Managers ......................................................................................... 3-15 Removing Managers ......................................................................................... 3-15
Table of Contents User's Manual
ii RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Configuring OV Severity ........................................................................................ 3-16 Configuring Web and Telnet Access ....................................................................... 3-16 Configuring the Syslog Parameters ........................................................................ 3-17
3.2 Setting the Operational Parameters .......................................................................... 3-19 Configuring Ethernet Ports .................................................................................... 3-19
Viewing Ethernet Port Information .................................................................... 3-20 Configuring Ethernet Port Parameters ............................................................... 3-21
Configuring E1/T1 Ports ........................................................................................ 3-22 Setting E1 Parameters ...................................................................................... 3-23 Setting T1 Parameters ...................................................................................... 3-24
Configuring ATM-155 Ports ................................................................................... 3-27 Accessing the SONET/SDH Layer ....................................................................... 3-27 Accessing the ATM Layer .................................................................................. 3-30
Setting the Protection Parameters ........................................................................ 3-31 Viewing the APS Statistics ................................................................................ 3-31 Removing APS .................................................................................................. 3-33 Applying and Clearing APS Switch Commands .................................................... 3-34
Defining the Clock Source ..................................................................................... 3-35 Setting the PSN Clock Recovery Parameters ...................................................... 3-37 Adding and Changing a Clock Recovery Source .................................................. 3-38
Configuring PPPoE Entities .................................................................................... 3-40 Adding or Changing a PPPoE Entity ................................................................... 3-41 Removing a PPPoE Entity .................................................................................. 3-42 Viewing the PPPoE Session Status .................................................................... 3-42 Adding a Virtual MAC Address (Bridge Configuration) ........................................ 3-43
Setting Abis Optimization ...................................................................................... 3-45 Setting LAN-to-LAN Bridging ................................................................................. 3-47 Configuring ATM Parameters ................................................................................. 3-51
Configuring Traffic Descriptors ......................................................................... 3-51 Configuring OAM Parameters ............................................................................ 3-57 Configuring IMA Groups .................................................................................... 3-62 Configuring ATM Cross-Connections (XCs) ......................................................... 3-74 Configuring CES Cross Connections (XCs) .......................................................... 3-80
Configuring Bridge Parameters .............................................................................. 3-87 Adding a Bridge Port ........................................................................................ 3-88
Configuring Router Parameters ............................................................................. 3-91 Defining Router Interfaces ............................................................................... 3-92 Setting the Static Route Parameters ................................................................. 3-96
Configuring MPLS Parameters ................................................................................ 3-99 Setting the Label Range ................................................................................. 3-100 Configuring the LDP Signaling Protocol ........................................................... 3-103 Configuring the LDP Interface Parameters ....................................................... 3-104 Setting the LDP Targeted Peers ...................................................................... 3-106 Configuring the Tunnel LSP Parameters ........................................................... 3-107
Configuring Multiservice over PSN Parameters ..................................................... 3-109 Configuring General Multiservice over PSN Parameters .................................... 3-110 Defining PSN Peers ......................................................................................... 3-111 Creating Pseudowire (PW) Connections .......................................................... 3-112 Configuring the General PW Parameters .......................................................... 3-113
System Commands ............................................................................................. 3-124 Poll Agent ...................................................................................................... 3-125 Default Configuration ..................................................................................... 3-125
3.3 Additional Tasks ..................................................................................................... 3-126 Viewing and Swapping Software Files .................................................................. 3-126
User's Manual Table of Contents
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 iii
Resetting to Default Configuration ...................................................................... 3-127 Viewing the License Status .................................................................................. 3-128 Restarting the Unit ............................................................................................. 3-128
Chapter 4. Configuring a Typical Application
4.1 Configuring Emulated ATM/TDM Services over PSN ...................................................... 4-1 Overview ................................................................................................................ 4-1 Configuration Sequence .......................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Configuring ACE-3100 ................................................................................................ 4-3 Configuring the Port Layer Parameters .................................................................... 4-3
Configuring the ATM-155 Ports .......................................................................... 4-3 Configuring the Ethernet Ports ........................................................................... 4-4
Configuring the Application Parameters ................................................................... 4-6 Configuring the Router Parameters ..................................................................... 4-6 Configuring the Traffic Descriptors ..................................................................... 4-7 Configuring the General Multiservice PW over PSN Parameters ............................ 4-9 Configuring the Remote Peer Parameters ........................................................... 4-9 Configuring the Pseudowire Parameters ........................................................... 4-10
Setting the Clock Source ....................................................................................... 4-11 4.3 Configuring ACE-3200 (1) ......................................................................................... 4-12
Configuring the Port Parameters ........................................................................... 4-12 Configuring the E1 Ports to IMA Mode .............................................................. 4-12 Configuring the Ethernet Ports ......................................................................... 4-13
Configuring the Application Parameters ................................................................. 4-15 Defining an IMA Group ..................................................................................... 4-15 Configuring the Router Parameters ................................................................... 4-16 Configuring the Traffic Descriptors ................................................................... 4-17 Configuring the General Multiservice PW over PSN Parameters .......................... 4-19 Configuring the Remote Peer Parameters ......................................................... 4-20 Configuring the Pseudowire Parameters ........................................................... 4-21
Setting the Clock Source ....................................................................................... 4-23 4.4 Configuring ACE-3200 (2) ......................................................................................... 4-25
Configuring the Port Layer Parameters .................................................................. 4-25 Configuring the E1/T1 Ports to CES-PSN Mode .................................................. 4-25 Configuring the Ethernet Ports ......................................................................... 4-26
Configuring the Application Parameters ................................................................. 4-27 Configuring the Router Interface ...................................................................... 4-27 Configuring the General Multiservice PW over PSN Parameters .......................... 4-28 Configuring the Remote Peer Parameters ......................................................... 4-28 Configuring the Pseudowire Parameters ........................................................... 4-29
Setting the Clock Source ....................................................................................... 4-31
Chapter 5. Performance Management
5.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 5-1 Statistic Tables and Graphs ..................................................................................... 5-1 Graph Characteristics .............................................................................................. 5-2
Vertical Axis Scale ............................................................................................... 5-2 Horizontal Axis ................................................................................................... 5-2 Interval Date and Time ....................................................................................... 5-2 Number of Displayed Polls .................................................................................. 5-2 Customizing the Appearance of Graph Lines ....................................................... 5-2 Numerical Value Tooltip ...................................................................................... 5-4
Table of Contents User's Manual
iv RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Setting the Polling Interval ...................................................................................... 5-4 Manually Polling the Agent ...................................................................................... 5-5
5.2 Monitoring the System ............................................................................................... 5-6 Displaying the Clock Performance ............................................................................ 5-6 Viewing Abis Statistics ............................................................................................ 5-8 Displaying the Protection Status ............................................................................. 5-8 Viewing Physical APS Table ...................................................................................... 5-8
Viewing the Physical APS Statistics ................................................................... 5-10 Displaying the Syslog Status ................................................................................. 5-12
5.3 Monitoring the Physical Ports Performance ............................................................... 5-13 Displaying the Ethernet Port Statistics ................................................................... 5-13 Displaying the E1/T1 Statistics .............................................................................. 5-18
Viewing the E1/T1 Port Current Statistics .......................................................... 5-18 Viewing the E1/T1 Port Intervals Statistics ........................................................ 5-20
Displaying the ATM-155 Port Statistics .................................................................. 5-22 Viewing the ATM-155 Current Statistics ............................................................ 5-23 Viewing the ATM-155 Intervals Statistics .......................................................... 5-24
5.4 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance .................................................................... 5-26 Displaying the ATM Layer and Port Statistics ......................................................... 5-26
Viewing the ATM Layer Current Statistics .......................................................... 5-26 Viewing the ATM Layer Intervals Statistics ......................................................... 5-28 Viewing the ATM Interface Current Statistics ..................................................... 5-30 Viewing the ATM Interface Interval Statistics ..................................................... 5-32
Viewing IMA Group and Link Statistics ................................................................... 5-34 Viewing an IMA Group's Status ......................................................................... 5-37 Viewing an IMA Group's Current Statistics ......................................................... 5-40 Viewing an IMA Group's Intervals Statistics ....................................................... 5-42 Viewing the IMA Link Current Statistics ............................................................. 5-44 Viewing the IMA Link Intervals Statistics ............................................................ 5-46
Viewing ATM XC Statistics ..................................................................................... 5-49 Viewing the ATM User Current Statistics ........................................................... 5-51 Viewing the ATM User Intervals Statistics .......................................................... 5-52 Viewing the VC User Current Statistics .............................................................. 5-54 Viewing the VC User Intervals Statistics ............................................................. 5-56 Viewing the VC OAM Current Statistics .............................................................. 5-58 Viewing the VC OAM Intervals Statistics ............................................................ 5-60 Viewing the VC OAM Loopback Current Statistics .............................................. 5-62 Viewing the VC OAM Loopback Intervals Statistics ............................................. 5-64
Viewing CES XC Statistics ...................................................................................... 5-66 Viewing the CES User Current Statistics ............................................................ 5-68 Viewing the CES User Intervals Statistics ........................................................... 5-70
5.5 Monitoring the PPPoE Sessions Performance ............................................................ 5-72 Displaying PPPoE Connection Status ...................................................................... 5-73
5.6 Monitoring the Multiservice over PSN Performance ................................................... 5-76 Displaying Pseudowire Connection Status .............................................................. 5-78 Displaying Pseudowire Connection Statistics ......................................................... 5-82
Viewing Pseudowire Current Statistics .............................................................. 5-82 Viewing Pseudowire Intervals Statistics ............................................................. 5-86
Chapter 6. Security Management
6.1 Adding Users.............................................................................................................. 6-1 6.2 Changing User Names ................................................................................................ 6-1 6.3 Changing Passwords .................................................................................................. 6-2
User's Manual Table of Contents
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 v
6.4 Setting Management Access Authorization ................................................................. 6-2 Using the EMS Security Console .............................................................................. 6-2 Setting a Security Profile ......................................................................................... 6-3 Setting Permissions ................................................................................................ 6-3
6.5 Enabling SNMPv3........................................................................................................ 6-4
Chapter 7. Fault Management
7.1 Handling Alarms and Faults ........................................................................................ 7-1 Interpreting Icon Colors ........................................................................................... 7-1 Viewing All Active Alarms ......................................................................................... 7-2 Masking Alarm Traps ............................................................................................... 7-5 Viewing the History Log ........................................................................................ 7-12 Clearing the History Log ........................................................................................ 7-14 List of Alarm Traps ................................................................................................ 7-14
7.2 Performing Diagnostic Tests ..................................................................................... 7-16 Viewing the Self-Test Results ................................................................................ 7-16 Setting the Loopback Timeout .............................................................................. 7-18 Performing Loopback Diagnostics .......................................................................... 7-19 Performing a Cell Test ........................................................................................... 7-20
7.3 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... 7-22 Checking the On-Screen LEDs................................................................................ 7-22 Corrective Measures .............................................................................................. 7-22
Testing the Unit ............................................................................................... 7-23 Displaying Self-Test Results .............................................................................. 7-23 Performing Physical Loopback Diagnostics ........................................................ 7-24 Performing a Cell Test ...................................................................................... 7-25
7.4 Frequently Asked Questions ..................................................................................... 7-26 7.5 Technical Support .................................................................................................... 7-28
Index
Table of Contents User's Manual
vi RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Product Options 1-1
Chapter 1
Introduction
1.1 ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Overview
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 is an advanced multiservice aggregation unit, optimized for transporting voice, video and data over 2G, 2.5G and 3G cellular networks or other networks. It provides aggregation abilities that are best suited for cellular operators and carriers.
All functional features of ACE-3100 and ACE-3200 are identical. The two units differ only in their physical size, the number of E1/T1 ports, and the number/position of power supplies. This user manual describes both products together, referring to them as "ACE-3100, ACE-3200".
Typically located at the BTS or Node B site (cell site), ACE-3100, ACE-3200 converts and aggregates traffic using N × E1/T1, STM-1/OC-3c and Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interfaces. The unit provides different aggregation/switching abilities over different types of networks.
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 has a flexible cross-connection matrix, and any of the physical ports can be dynamically connected towards the user or network side.
1.2 Product Options
Chassis Options
ACE-3100 and ACE-3200 are both standalone, non-modular units.
ACE-3100 is equipped with 4 E1/T1 ports.
ACE-3200 is equipped with 8 or 16 E1/T1 ports, depending on customer requirements and ordering options.
Interface Options
E1 or T1 is supported depending on the country of distribution. The ATM-155 (155 Mbps) interface is either STM-1 or OC-3c compliant, depending on the country of distribution.
Note
Chapter 1 Introduction User's Manual
1-2 RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Overview RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Power Options
ACE-3100 is supplied with one power supply, which can be either AC-powered or DC-powered (as ordered).
ACE-3200 is supplied with one or two power supplies, which can be either AC-powered or DC-powered (as ordered).
License Packs
Both units can be ordered with a clock recovery hardware component, which requires a suitable software license pack.
The available software license packs are:
PACK1 Pseudowire over PSN functionality
PACK2 Clock recovery functionality
LDP Label distribution protocol (LDP) functionality
1.3 RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Overview
'RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200' is a comprehensive GUI-based management software application for monitoring and controlling ACE-3100, ACE-3200. The RADview solution conforms to the ITU-T Telecommunication Management Network (TMN) recommendations for SNMP management systems, known as the FCAPS management model:
• Fault management – Detects and correlates faults in network devices, isolates faults, and initiates recovery actions.
• Configuration management –
Tracks configuration changes
Configures, installs, and distributes software and configuration files across the network
Enables viewing and modifying the configuration of the system, ports, and alarms
Enables viewing the diagnostics and status information.
• Accounting management – Collects accounting data and generates network usage reports.
• Performance management – Continuously monitors network performance (QoS, CoS) and resource allocation.
• Security management – Controls and restricts access to network resources.
User's Manual Chapter 1 Introduction
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Overview 1-3
Configuration Operations
Configuration operations can be performed at the system or device, port, logical layer and application levels.
Device-Level Configuration
Device level configuration operations are available when the device image is selected in the main window.
The following table summarizes the different configuration options at the system level.
Table 1-1. Device-Level Configuration Options
Task Relevant Dialog Box RADview Path
Polling the hardware Poll Agent Configuration
System Commands
Poll Agent
(or button)
Resetting the hardware Reset Configuration
System Commands
Reset
Restoring the default
system configuration
Default Configuration Configuration
System Commands
Default Configuration
Configuring system
information
System Info Configuration
System Info
Configuring management
locations
Manager List Options
Manager List
Configuring OV severity OV Severity Options
OV Severity
Configuring access to web
and Telnet status
Access Options
Access
Configuring OAM
parameters
OAM Parameter Configuration Configuration
ATM
OAM
Parameters
Configuring OAM
descriptors
OAM Descriptor Configuration Configuration
ATM
OAM
Descriptor
Chapter 1 Introduction User's Manual
1-4 RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Overview RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Port-Level Configuration
Port level configuration operations are available when a port is selected in the main window.
The same RADview path can open different dialog boxes, depending on the selected port.
The following table summarizes the different configuration options at the port level.
Table 1-2. Port-Level Configuration Options
Task Relevant Dialog Box RADview Path
Viewing ETH port status Port Status Click on device port
Port Status
Configuring ETH port
parameters
Port Parameters Click on device port
Configuration
Parameters
Configuring E1 ports E1 Port Parameters Click on device port
Configuration
Parameters
Configuring T1/J1 ports T1 Port Parameters Click on device port
Configuration
Parameters
Configuring ATM-155
SONET/SDH layer
Port Parameters Click on device port
Configuration
Parameters
Configuring ATM-155 ATM
layer
Port Parameters Click on device port
Configuration
Parameters
Configuring E1/T1/J1 OAM
Cell Generation
Port Parameters Click on device port
Configuration
Parameters
Configuring APS APS Table Configuration
Protection
APS
Logical Layer Configuration
At the logical layer you can configure PPPoE protocol and Abis optimization parameters, if such features are used and required in your application.
• PPPoE parameters – ACE-3100, ACE-3200 allows initiation of PPPoE sessions for retrieving IP addresses of all data, voice and management sources, to allow HSPDA connectivity in a variety of DSL-based cellular backhaul applications.
Note
User's Manual Chapter 1 Introduction
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Overview 1-5
• Abis parameters – E1 traffic in ACE-3100, ACE-3200 can be set to work in Abis optimization mode.
Table 1-3. Logical-Level Options
Task Relevant Dialog Box RADview Path
PPPoE parameters PPPoE Table Configuration
PPPoE
Abis logical ports Abis Logical Ports Table Configuration
Abis
Application-Level Configuration
Application level configuration consists of configuring the application parameters, which include the ATM, bridge, router, MPLS and PSN functionality categories.
The application parameters are configured according to the nature of the specific application in which ACE-3100, ACE-3200 is used.
Table 1-4. Application-Level Options
Task Relevant Dialog Box RADview Path
Configuring traffic
descriptors
Traffic Descriptors Configuration
ATM
Traffic Descriptor
Configuring ATM cross
connections (XC)
ATM XC Parameters Configuration
ATM
XC
ATM
Configuring CES cross
connections (XC)
CES XC Parameters Configuration
ATM
XC
CES
Configuring traffic
descriptors
Traffic Descriptor Configuration
ATM
Traffic Descriptor
Configuring IMA groups IMA Group Table Configuration
ATM
IMA Group
Configuring OAM OAM Parameters Configuration
ATM
OAM
Parameters
Chapter 1 Introduction User's Manual
1-6 RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Overview RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Task Relevant Dialog Box RADview Path
Configuring MPLS MPLS Parameters Configuration
MPLS
Parameters
Configuring Ingress LSP
Tunnel
Ingress LSP Tunnel Table Configuration
MPLS
Tunnel LSP
Ingress
Configuring Egress LSP
Tunnel
Egress LSP Tunnel Table Configuration
MPLS
Tunnel LSP
Egress
Configuring LDP LDP Parameters Configuration
MPLS
LDP
Parameters
Configuring ATM
MultiService over PSN
Multi Service over PSN – ATM
Parameters
Configuration
Multi Service over PSN
General
ATM
Configuring Pseudowire
(PW)
Pseudowire Table Configuration
Multi Service over PSN
PW
Performance Monitoring Operations
Performance monitoring operations can be performed at the system or device, port, logical layer and application levels.
Device-Level Performance Monitoring
Device level performance operations are available when the device image is selected in the main window.
The following table summarizes the different configuration options at the system level.
Table 1-5. Device-Level Performance Monitoring Options
Task Relevant Dialog Box RADview Path
Setting polling interval Polling Interval Statistics
Polling Interval
User's Manual Chapter 1 Introduction
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Overview 1-7
Task Relevant Dialog Box RADview Path
IMA group current
statistics
IMA Group Current Statistics Statistics
ATM
IMA Group
Statistics
ATM PW current
packets statistics
ATM PW Current Packets Statistics Statistics
ATM
XC
ATM
(EP-1 or EP-2)
Statistics
VC user current
statistics
VC User Current Statistics Statistics
ATM
XC
CES
ATM Statistics
CES user current
statistics
CES User Current Statistics Statistics
ATM
XC
CES
CES Statistics
ATM PW current
packets statistics
ATM PW Current Packets Statistics Statistics
Multiservice over PSN
PW
ATM
Statistics
TDM PW current
packets statistics
TDM PW Current Packets Statistics Statistics
Multiservice over PSN
PW
TDM
Statistics
Viewing ATM XC
statistics
ATM XC Statistics Statistics
ATM
XC
ATM
Viewing CES XC
statistics
CES XC Statistics Statistics
ATM
XC
CES
Syslog statistics Syslog Statistics Statistics
Syslog
Chapter 1 Introduction User's Manual
1-8 RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Overview RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Port-Level Performance Monitoring
Port level performance operations are available when the port is selected in the main window.
The following table summarizes the different performance options at the port level.
Table 1-6. Port-Level Performance Options
Task Relevant Dialog Box RADview Path
ADSL2+ port current
statistics
Port Current Statistics Statistics
Current
ADSL2+ port intervals
statistics
Port Intervals Statistics Statistics
Intervals
SHDSL port current
statistics
Port Current Statistics Statistics
Wire-Pair
Current
SHDSL port intervals
statistics
Port Intervals Statistics Statistics
Wire-Pair
Intervals
Viewing the E1/T1 port
current statistics
Port Current Statistics Statistics
Current
Viewing the E1/T1 port
intervals statistics
Port Intervals Statistics Statistics
Intervals
Viewing the ATM layer
current statistics
Interface Current Statistics Statistics
Current
Viewing the ATM layer
intervals statistics
Interface Intervals Statistics Statistics
Intervals
Viewing physical APS
table
Physical APS Table Configuration
Physical APS Table
APS statistics APS Statistics Statistics
Protection
APS
Statistics
Logical Layer Performance Monitoring
At the logical layer you can monitor the performance of PPPoE sessions issued by ACE-3100, ACE-3200, and monitor the Abis optimization performance.
The following table summarizes the different performance options at the logical layer level.
User's Manual Chapter 1 Introduction
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Overview 1-9
Table 1-7. Logical Layer Performance Options
Task Relevant Dialog Box RADview Path
PPPoE status PPPoE Table Configuration
Satus
Abis logical ports
statistics
Abis Logical Ports Statistics Statistics
Abis
Application-Level Performance Monitoring
The application monitoring options allow you to review the actual performance of the unit with regards to the application parameters, ATM, bridge, router, MPLS, and multisource over PSN.
The following table summarizes the different performance options at the logical layer level.
Table 1-8. Application Layer Performance Options
Task Relevant Dialog Box RADview Path
Viewing IMA groups IMA Group Table Configuration
ATM
IMA Group
Viewing the IMA link
current statistics
IMA Link Current Statistics Statistics
ATM
IMA Group
Current
Viewing the IMA link
intervals statistics
IMA Link Intervals Statistics Statistics
ATM
IMA Group
Intervals
Viewing ATM XC
statistics
ATM XC Statistics Statistics
ATM
XC
ATM
Viewing CES XC
statistics
CES XC Statistics Statistics
ATM
XC
CES
Chapter 1 Introduction User's Manual
1-10 RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Overview RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Fault Detection Operations
Fault detection operations can be performed at the system or device, port and application level.
Device-Level Fault Detection
Device level operations are available when the device image is selected in the main window.
The following table summarizes the different fault detection options at the system level.
Table 1-9. Device-Level Fault Detection Options
Task Relevant Dialog Box RADview Path
Viewing all active alarms All Active Alarms Fault
All Active Alarms
Viewing the history log History Log Fault
History Log
List
Clearing the history log Clear Log Fault
History Log
Clear
Setting the loopback
timeout
Loopback Timeout Diagnostics
Loopback Timeout
Performing a cell test Cell Test Diagnostics
Cell Test
Port-Level Fault Detection
Port level operations are available when the port is selected in the main window.
The same RADview path can open different dialog boxes, depending on the selected port.
The following table summarizes the different fault detection options at the port level.
Table 1-10. Port-Level Fault Detection Options
Task Relevant Dialog Box RADview Path
Loopback status Port Loopback State Diagnostics
Loopback Timeout
Port status Port Status Click on device port
Configuration
Port Status
Note
User's Manual Chapter 1 Introduction
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Overview 1-11
Application-Level Fault Detection
Table 1-11. Application-Level Fault Detection Options
Task Relevant Dialog Box RADview Path
PW connectivity check Pseudo Wire Status Configuration
Multiservice over PSN
PW
Status
Chapter 1 Introduction User's Manual
1-12 RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Overview RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Connecting to the Management Station 2-1
Chapter 2
Installation and Operation This chapter describes:
• Setting up and installing the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 unit for network management
• Using the graphical user interface of the zoom application.
2.1 Pre-Configuring for Network Management
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 must be pre-configured for connection to a network management station. For information about how to configure the unit for network management, see Chapter 4 of the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Installation and Operation Manual.
2.2 Connecting to the Management Station
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 can be connected to the RADview management station in the following methods:
• Using an Out-of-Band LAN Connection
• Using an Inband ATM VC Connection
• Using an IP-Based or Inband PW Connection.
Using an Out-of-Band LAN Connection
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 can be managed by a management station through an out-of-band LAN connection.
Figure 1-1. Physical Setup for Management via LAN
Chapter 2 Installation and Operation User's Manual
2-2 Connecting to the Management Station RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
To set up management access via a LAN:
1. Connect ACE-3100, ACE-3200 to an unused (out-of-band) ETH port on the front panel.
2. Log in to ACE-3100, ACE-3200 via an ASCII terminal.
3. Configure the unit for network management as described in Configuring for Management in Chapter 4 of the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Installation and Operation Manual.
Using an Inband ATM VC Connection
When managed through an inband ATM VC, ACE-3100, ACE-3200 is connected to the management station through the ATM network, via one of the active ATM ports.
Figure 1-2. Physical Setup for Management via ATM
To set up management access via an ATM port:
1. Connect the unit to the ATM network via one of the ATM ports on the front panel.
2. Log in to the unit via an ASCII terminal.
3. Configure the unit for network management as described in Configuring for Management in Chapter 4 of the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Installation and Operation Manual.
Using an IP-Based or Inband PW Connection
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 can be managed by a management station through an out of-band LAN connection.
Figure 1-3. Physical Setup for Management via PSN
To set up management access via a packet-switched network connection:
1. Connect the unit to the packet-switched network via one of the GbE ports on the front panel.
User's Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Operation
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Launching RADview ACE-3100, ACE-3200 2-3
2. Log in to ACE-3100, ACE-3200 via an ASCII terminal.
3. Configure the unit for network management as described in Configuring for Management in Chapter 4 of the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Installation and Operation Manual.
2.3 Launching RADview ACE-3100, ACE-3200
The zoom application can be invoked from the SNMPc Management Console (PC version), HPOV (Unix version), or Network Elements Tree.
To activate ACE-3100, ACE-3200 from the SNMPc Management Console window (PC version):
• Double-click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 icon located in the map view.
Figure 2-4. SNMPc Management Console Window – Map View
To activate ACE-3100, ACE-3200 from the EMS HPOV window (Unix version):
• Select the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 icon located in the map view and click the
zoom icon ( ).
To activate ACE-3100, ACE-3200 from the Network Elements Tree window (in both PC and Unix versions):
1. From the RADview-EMS LaunchDesk, select the Network Element Tree icon
( ).
Chapter 2 Installation and Operation User's Manual
2-4 Using the Graphical User Interface (GUI) RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
The Network Elements Tree window appears and displays a hierarchal network tree (see Figure 2-5), which is a graphical representation of all IP addresses that are currently assigned to devices over the local network.
2. On the Network Elements Tree, right-click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 IP address.
The ACE-3100, ACE-3200 IP address is highlighted and a pop-up menu appears.
3. From the pop-up menu, select Zoom.
Figure 2-5. Network Element Tree – Performing Zoom
The ACE-3100, ACE-3200 zoom application (management) window appears.
2.4 Using the Graphical User Interface (GUI)
You can easily configure and monitor ACE-3100, ACE-3200 by using the zoom application.
The zoom application’s GUI presents an interactive image of the unit's front panel, and allows you to configure and monitor ACE-3100, ACE-3200 at the system (device) level, or at the individual port level.
The GUI is context-sensitive. Selecting the entire device allows you to perform system-level operations, while drilling down to a specific interface or port allows you to perform port-level operations that relate only to that interface.
User's Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Operation
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Using the Graphical User Interface (GUI) 2-5
Using the Device Level Interface
To access the device level commands:
• Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image and avoid clicking on any of the ports.
A light blue frame surrounds the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 device image in the main window.
Figure 2-6. ACE-3100 Main Window – System Level Selected
Figure 2-7. ACE-3200 Main Window – System Level Selected
The ACE-3100, ACE-3200 system-level interface includes the following components:
• Title bar – Displays the IP address and status (Connected or Disconnected) of the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 device.
• Menu bar – Lists the system’s various menu options: Configuration, Fault, Diagnostics, Statistics, Options, and Help. Each of these menus includes relevant options, as explained in the next chapters of this manual.
Chapter 2 Installation and Operation User's Manual
2-6 Using the Graphical User Interface (GUI) RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 2-8. Window Menu Bar – Configuration Menu
• Toolbar – Three buttons are available on the toolbar:
System Info – Displays the System Information window, which summarizes the status and general details of the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 device.
Poll Agent – When clicked, the NMS polls the SNMP agent.
• Status bar – Displays the system status information via text.
Figure 2-9. Window Status Bar
Using the Port Level Interface
Prior to accessing the port-level commands, the color of each port in the graphic device image indicates the operational status of that port. The displayed status is based on both the polling and interface notifications. The color indicators are:
No Color – The port is OK and no test is currently running.
Light Blue – The port is currently testing.
Magenta – The port has active alarms.
To access the port-level commands:
1. Click the required port in the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame surrounds the selected port in the device image.
User's Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Operation
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Using the Graphical User Interface (GUI) 2-7
Figure 2-10. Main Window – ATM-155 Port 2 Selected
2. Click the Zoom In button ( ), located on the toolbar. Alternatively, from the Configuration menu, select Zoom In.
The port window appears and displays a graphic representation of the port.
Figure 2-11. ATM-155 Port-Level Window
The port level window includes the following components:
• Menu Bar – Lists the various menu options for the currently selected layer. The available options change when you select a different layer.
• Port layers – Labeled rectangles that represent the different port layers available for configuration in the selected port. Each layer is managed individually.
To select a particular port layer:
• In the port-level window, click the layer’s labeled rectangle.
A blue frame surrounds the selected layer.
Chapter 2 Installation and Operation User's Manual
2-8 Using the Graphical User Interface (GUI) RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 2-12. ATM-155 Port-Level Window – ATM Layer Selected
The different port-level windows allow you to monitor and configure the port/layer parameters. The various configuration options are explained in Configuration Management, and the various monitoring options are explained in Performance Management.
Prior to accessing the slot-level commands, the color of each slot in the graphic device image indicates the operational status of that slot.
On-Screen LED Indicators
The graphic device image in the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 window (see Figure 1-7) displays the LED indicators and their status in complete synchronization with the physical device LEDs.
The ACE-3100, ACE-3200 LED indicators are listed and explained in the following tables.
Table 2-1. System-Level LEDs
System-Level LEDs Color Description
PS1 Green On – Power supply 1 is on
Off – Power supply 1 is off
RDY Green On – Self test ended successfully
Off – No Power
PS2 Green On – Power supply 2 is on
Off – Power supply 2 is off
ALM Red On – One or more alarms are on
Off – No alarm is active
User's Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Operation
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Using the Graphical User Interface (GUI) 2-9
Table 2-2. ETH Port LEDs
ETH port LEDs Color Description
LINK Green On – Ethernet link has been detected
Off – Ethernet link has not been detected
ACT Yellow On – A frame was received or transmitted
during the last second
Off – No frame was received or
transmitted during the last second
Note: ACE-3100, ACE-3200 always displays this LED as Off.
Table 2-3. ATM Port LEDs
ATM Port LEDS Color Description
ATM Green On – At least one cell was received or
transmitted during the last second without
any HEC errors
Off – No cell was transmitted or received
during the last second
SYNC Green On – The STM-1 port is synchronized, and
no alarm is detected
Off – LOS, LOF, LOP, AIS
Blinking – RDI detected
Table 2-4. E1/T1 Port LEDs
E1/T1 Port LEDs Color Description
SYNC Green On – Physical layer is synchronized
Off – Physical layer is not synchronized
Chapter 2 Installation and Operation User's Manual
2-10 Using the Graphical User Interface (GUI) RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the System Parameters 3-1
Chapter 3
Configuration Management This chapter describes how to configure parameters, and the configuration options available and comprises:
• Setting the System Parameters
• Setting the Operational Parameters
• Additional Tasks.
3.1 Setting the System Parameters
This chapter describes how to configure parameters, and the configuration options available:
• Entering General System Information
• Setting the Date and Time
• Setting the Manager List
• Configuring OV Severity
• Configuring Web and Telnet Access
• Configuring the Syslog Parameters.
Entering General System Information
The system information option enables you to view and set general information about the selected device. This feature is available even when there is no communication with the agent.
To view the system information:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame surrounds the device image and the main menu becomes available.
2. From the main menu, select Configuration > System Info;
Or –
On the main toolbar, click the Info button ( ).
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-2 Setting the System Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-1. System Information Dialog Box
If the System Information dialog box is left open for several minutes or more, you can click <Refresh> to retrieve and display the most current information. If necessary, you can modify the system information parameters.
To modify the system information:
• Enter new information in the editable fields (see Table 3-1), and click <Set>.
The system performs validity checks and the changes take effect if no errors are detected.
Table 3-1. System Information Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW/RO)
Description The hardware and software versions of
the device.
(Read only)
Object ID The device’s SNMP Object ID (Read only)
Name The identifying name of the device Up to 12 case-sensitive
alphanumeric characters
Default: “ACE-3200”
Contact The identifying name of the contact
person for the managed node
Up to 32 case-sensitive
alphanumeric characters
Default: “Name of
contact person”
Location The physical location of the device Up to 32 case-sensitive
alphanumeric characters
Default: “Location of
this device”
System Up Time The period for which the system has
been running
Format: d days,
hh:mm:ss (Read only)
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the System Parameters 3-3
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW/RO)
Number of
Interfaces
The number of device interfaces (Read Only)
Even if there is no communication with the agent, ACE-3100, ACE-3200 obtains and saves the following parameters concerning system information:
• Description
• Name
• Contact
• Location
Setting the Date and Time
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 allows you to set the date and time of its internal clock. Log events are recorded according to the set date and time. In addition, you can set the unit to automatically retrieve the current date and time from an SNTP server.
To set the date and time:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame surrounds the device image and the main menu becomes available.
2. From the main menu, select Configuration > Date & Time.
Figure 3-2. Date and Time dialog box
Note
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-4 Setting the System Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Table 3-2. Date and Time Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW/RO)
Date
Actual date.
You can select a different date from the
drop-down calendar. The date is subject to
validity checks (see Validating the Date and Time ).
Format: YYYY-MM-DD
Time
Actual time.
The entered time is subject to validity
checks (see Validating the Date and Time ).
Format: hh:mm:ss
SNTP Mode Set system NTP mode Disable
Broadcast Client
Unicast Client
Time Zone Select GMT
Available when SNTP mode is Unicast or
Broadcast Client
GMT –12:00,
GMT –11:00
GMT –1:00,
GMT,
GMT +1:00
GMT +12:00
Server IP Server IP address
Available only when SNTP mode is Unicast
Client
IP Address
Update
Interval
Available only when SNTP mode is Unicast
Client
1…1440 mins
Validating the Date and Time
When you click <Set> in the System Information dialog box, ACE-3100, ACE-3200 validates the date and time and SNTP entries:
• Date validation
The day may be 31 only if the month is 1, 3, 5, 7, 8, 10, or 12
The day cannot be 30 if the month is 2
The day cannot be 29 if the month is 2 unless the year can be divided by four
The day cannot be 29 if the month is 2 and the year can be divided by 100 but not by 400.
If the date is found to be invalid, an invalid date error message is displayed on the status bar, and the date is not set.
If the combination of day, month, and year is nonexistent, ACE-3100, ACE-3200 issues the subsequent valid date in the next month (for example, if you enter 31/9/02, it is automatically converted to 01/10/02).
• Time validation – If the entered time is not valid, an invalid time error message appears on the status bar, and time is not set.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the System Parameters 3-5
Setting the Summer Time Parameters
The Summer Time changes are preset to change automatically. Select Date to enter the specific date for the time change. Select Recurring to enter date range for yearly time adjustments.
To set the summer time by specific dates:
1. Select Date from the Mode in the Date and Time dialog box. (See Figure 3-2.)
2. Click Change.
The Summer Time Date Configuration dialog box is displayed.
Figure 3-3. Summer Time Date Configuration
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW/RO)
Start Date
Date to start classifying as Summer Time.
The date is subject to validity checks (see
Validating the Date and Time ).
Format: YYYY-MM-DD
Start Time
Time to start classifying as Summer Time.
The entered time is subject to validity
checks (see Validating the Date and Time ).
Format: hh:mm:ss
End Date
Date to end classifying as Summer Time.
The date is subject to validity checks (see
Validating the Date and Time ).
Format: YYYY-MM-DD
End Time
Time to end classifying as Summer Time.
The entered time is subject to validity
checks (see Validating the Date and Time ).
Format: hh:mm:ss
3. Enter the start and end dates and times.
4. Click OK to save the settings.
To set recurring summer time dates:
1. Select Recurring from the Mode in the Date and Time dialog box.
2. Click Change.
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-6 Setting the System Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
The Summer Time Recurring Configuration dialog box is displayed.
Figure 3-4. Summer Time Recurring Configuration
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW/RO)
Start Week in
Month
Day of the week to start classifying as
Summer Time.
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Last
Start Weekday Day of the week to start classifying as
Summer Time.
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Start Month
Month within which to start classifying as
Summer Time.
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the System Parameters 3-7
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW/RO)
Start Time
Time to start classifying as Summer Time.
The entered time is subject to validity
checks (see Validating the Date and Time ).
Format: hh:mm:ss
End Week in
Month
Day of the week to end classifying as
Summer Time.
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Last
End Weekday Day of the week to end classifying as
Summer Time.
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
End Month
Month within which to end classifying as
Summer Time.
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
End Time
Time to end classifying as Summer Time.
The entered time is subject to validity
checks (see Validating the Date and Time ).
Format: hh:mm:ss
3. Enter the start and end dates and times.
4. Click OK to save the settings.
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-8 Setting the System Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Setting the Manager List
If ACE-3100, ACE-3200 is to be managed via a network management station, it is necessary define the location of network managers who can access the unit via inband or out-of-band management channels. Managers are defined via the Manager List.
The Manager List dialog box displays the IP addresses of the currently defined managers, i.e., terminals that can establish SNMP connectivity with the device and control its functions.
Viewing Current Manager IPs
The Manager List dialog box displays the IP addresses of the currently defined managers, i.e., terminals that can establish SNMP connectivity with the device and control its functions.
To display the current managers list:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame surrounds the device image.
2. From the main menu, select Options.
3. From the Options menu, select Manager List.
Figure 3-5. Manager List Dialog Box
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the System Parameters 3-9
Table 3-3. Manager List Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Current Number of
Entries
Current number of configured managers 0–16
Maximum Number of
Entries
Maximum number of managers that can be
defined
16
Manager IP Address IP address of the listed manager IP address format
Host Index Host index of the listed manager 1–2
Next Hop IP address of the manager’s next hop IP address format
<Add> Allows you to add managers to the list (up
to 16 managers). The button is disabled
when the table has the maximum number
of managers.
<Change> Allows you to reconfigure an existing
manager, as explained in Modifying Managers. The button is disabled when no
entry is selected.
<Remove> Allows you to delete the selected
manager. The button is disabled when no
entry is selected. When you click this
button, the confirmation message
“Removing this manager may disconnect
NMS” appears. Click <OK> to continue
with the operation, or <Cancel> to cancel
the removal.
<Close> Closes the Manager List dialog box.
<Refresh> Retrieves and displays the most current
manager information.
Masking Traps
Mask traps can be configured for each manager through the Mask Traps dialog box, which is invoked from the Add Manager and Change Manager dialog boxes.
Selecting a parameter in the Mask Traps dialog box (see Figure 3-6) activates the mask. The trap is therefore not sent.
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-10 Setting the System Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-6. Mask Traps Dialog Box
Table 3-4. Mask Traps – Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW)
Masking Mode
Group of three option buttons:
• All – All the traps are masked.
• None – None of the traps are masked.
• Manual – Enabling or disabling traps is performed
manually.
All
None
Manual
Cold Start This trap indicates that the Agent is re-initializing itself in
such a way that the Agent’s configuration may be
altered.
Activated
Not activated
Agent Status
Changed
The agnStatusChangeTrap trap is sent whenever there is
a change in the state of the device. This trap is also used
for coloring the Agent node on the HPOV map.
Activated
Not activated
TFTP Status Changed The tftpStatusChangeTrap trap is sent whenever a TFTP
session is opened between the Agent and the NMS.
Masking it, fails the operation of TFTP applications.
Activated
Not activated
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the System Parameters 3-11
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW)
Authentication
Failure
This trap is sent when an SNMP request is made under a
community name that does not match the community
name in the Agent.
Activated
Not activated
Power Supply Failure The agnPowerFailureTrap trap is sent to indicate a power
failure state.
It is relevant only to a device with two PSUs, e.g., the
device can not send a trap before one PSU is shut down,
only upon a status change while the other PSU is up.
Activated
Not activated
Fan Failure The agnFanFailureTrap trap is sent to indicate a fan
failure/recovery.
Activated
Not activated
Clock Source State
Change
Three possible clock states:
A – Master/Primary clock
B – Fallback/Secondary
C – Internal oscillator
Activated
Not activated
Recovered Clock
State
This option is available only if the clock recovery
hardware component and the proper software license are
installed.
Activated
Not activated
Agent Uploaded Data The Agent Uploaded Data trap. Activated
Not activated
Self Test Result
Change
The Self Test Result Change trap. Activated
Not activated
Redundancy Active
Port
The Redundancy Active Port trap. Activated
Not activated
APS Active Port The APS Active Port trap. Activated
Not activated
License Update The license update status alarm trap. This option is
available only if the proper software license is installed.
Activated
Not activated
Recovered Clock
Frequency Alarm
This option is available only if the clock recovery
hardware component and the proper software license are
installed.
Activated
Not activated
Port Status Changed The prtStatusChangeTrap trap is sent whenever the SFP
port is taken out from the device or inserted.
Activated
Not activated
LCD The atmAceAlarmLCD trap is sent to indicate a Loss of
Cell Delineation condition.
Activated
Not activated
Link Up/Down • LinkDown – Indicates that the operation status of the
ETH link is down.
• LinkUp – Indicates that the operation status of the
ETH link is up.
Activated
Not activated
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-12 Setting the System Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW)
SLM The atmAceAlarmSLM trap is sent to indicate a Signal Line
Mismatch condition
Activated
Not activated
LOS The atmAceAlarmLOS trap is sent when there is a
condition indicating that the receiving equipment has lost
the received signal.
Activated
Not activated
LOP The atmAceAlarmSLM trap is sent to indicate a condition
that the receiver equipment has lost the pointer to the
start of cell in the payload.
Activated
Not activated
LOF The atmAceAlarmLOF trap is sent when there is a
condition indicating that the receiving equipment has lost
frame delineation.
Activated
Not activated
Line AIS The atmAceAlarmLineAIS trap is sent by a device when it
detects an error condition or receives an error condition
from another unit in the transmission path.
Activated
Not activated
Path AIS The atmAceAlarmPathAIS trap is sent by a device when it
detects an error condition or receives an error condition
from another unit in the transmission path.
Activated
Not activated
Line RDI The atmAceAlarmLineRDI trap is sent to indicate a
Remote Line Defect Indication condition.
Activated
Not activated
Path RDI The atmAceAlarmPathRDI trap is sent to indicate a
Remote Path Defect Indication condition.
Activated
Not activated
Section BIP The atmAceAlarmSectionBIP trap is sent to indicate an
error performance of the link at the Section layer.
Bit Interleaved Parity is a method used at the Physical
layer to monitor the error performance of the link. A
check bit is sent in the link overhead covering the
previous block or frame.
Activated
Not activated
Line BIP The atmAceAlarmLineBIP trap is sent to indicate an error
performance of the link at the Line layer.
Activated
Not activated
Path BIP The atmAceAlarmPathBIP trap is sent to indicate an error
performance of the link at the Path layer.
Activated
Not activated
Line FEBE The atmAceAlarmLineFEBE trap is sent to indicate that a
bit error(s) has been detected at the Physical layer at the
far-end of the link.
This is used to monitor bit error performance of the link
in the Line layer.
Activated
Not activated
Path FEBE The atmAceAlarmPathFEBE trap is sent to indicate that a
bit error(s) has been detected at the Physical layer at the
far-end of the link.
This is used to monitor bit error performance of the link
in the Path layer.
Activated
Not activated
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the System Parameters 3-13
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW)
PW Up/Down PseudoWire connection status Activated
Not activated
BFD Session
Up/Down
BFD Session status Activated
Not activated
LDP Session
Up/Down
LDP Session status Activated
Not activated
ADSL Rate Changed Follow up on the speed at which traffic passes through
the ADSL links.
Activated
Not activated
IMA Group Status
Changed
The AtmImaGroupStatusChangeTrap trap is sent if an IMA
group status changed.
Activated
Not activated
VP Continuity Loss The AtmAceAlarmVpContinuityLoss trap is sent to indicate
a Loss of continuity on a VP Connection.
Activated
Not activated
VC Continuity Loss The AtmAceAlarmVcContinuityLoss trap is sent to indicate
a Loss of continuity on a VC Connection.
Activated
Not activated
VP AIS Reception The AtmAceAlarmVpAISReception trap is sent to indicate
AIS Reception on a VP Connection.
Activated
Not activated
VC AIS Reception The AtmAceAlarmVcAISReception trap is sent to indicate
AIS Reception on a VC Connection.
Activated
Not activated
VP RDI Reception The AtmAceAlarmVpRDIReception trap is sent to indicate
RDI Reception on a VP Connection.
Activated
Not activated
VC RDI Reception The AtmAceAlarmVcRDIReception trap is sent to indicate
RDI Reception on a VC Connection.
Activated
Not activated
VP Loopback Failure The AtmAceAlarmVpLoopback trap is sent to indicate an
error resulting from an OAM Loopback failure in the VP
layer.
Activated
Not activated
VC Loopback Failure The AtmAceAlarmVcLoopback trap is sent to indicate an
error resulting from an OAM Loopback failure in the VC
layer.
Activated
Not activated
Adding Managers
The Manager List dialog box displays the IP addresses of the currently defined managers, i.e., terminals that can establish SNMP connectivity with the device and control its functions.
To add a manager:
1. In the Manager List dialog box (see Figure 3-5), click <Add>.
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-14 Setting the System Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-7. Add Manager Dialog Box
2. Enter the necessary parameters in the editable fields (see Table 3-5).
3. Click <Mask Traps> to define the mask traps for this manager (for more information see Masking Traps).
4. Click <Set>.
The system validates the new manager. Once validated, the manager is added to the Manager List.
Table 3-5. Add Manager Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW)
Manager IP Address IP address of the workstation to be
defined as manager.
IP address format
Host Index The manager’s host index number.
Clicking the […] button opens a dialog box
that allows the host IPs to be configured
(for more information, see Defining the Clock Source
1–2
Next Hop Enabled only when selected host port type
is ETH.
IP address format
Validating Managers
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 performs the following manager validations:
• Checks the validity and value of the Manager IP Address and Next Hop. If found invalid, an error message appears.
• Checks whether the next hop is in the Host IP Subnet. If not, an error message appears.
• Checks whether the added manager already exists in the table. If so, an error message appears.
• Checks whether the manager's IP address is different than all host IP addresses. If not, an error message appears.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the System Parameters 3-15
Modifying Managers
You can reconfigure the mask traps of a defined manager, using the Change Manager dialog box.
To reconfigure a manager’s mask traps:
1. In the Manager List dialog box (see Figure 3-5), select the row of a manager that you want to reconfigure, and click <Change>.
The Change Manager dialog box appears displaying the same parameters that are displayed in the Add Manager dialog box (see Figure 3-7). However, here these parameters are non-editable.
Figure 3-8. Change Manager Dialog Box
2. Click <Mask Traps>.
The Mask Traps dialog box appears.
3. Edit the parameters selection in the Mask Traps dialog box (see Figure 3-6 and Table 3-4).
4. Click <Set>.
Removing Managers
To remove a manager from the list:
1. In the Manager List dialog box (see Figure 3-5), select the manager you want to remove.
2. Click <Remove>.
The Remove Manager dialog box appears.
3. Click <OK>.
The manager is removed from the list.
Take care when removing a manager from the list; it may result in disconnection from the agent.
Note
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-16 Setting the System Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Configuring OV Severity
The OV Severity determines whether the openViewSeverity MIB is attached to the relevant traps. This parameter controls the severity and color of a given trap displayed in the HPOV All Alarms Browser.
To select OV Severity mode:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame surrounds the device image.
2. From the main menu, select Options.
3. Select OV Severity.
The OV Severity dialog box appears and displays the current OV severity state.
Figure 3-9. OV Severity Dialog Box
4. From the drop-down list, select Yes to enable OV severity, or No to disable OV Severity.
5. Click <Set>.
The selected mode takes effect.
Table 3-6. OV Severity Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
Attach OV Severity
to Traps
Yes – OV Severity attached
No – OV Severity not attached
Yes
No
Configuring Web and Telnet Access
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 allows you to check the current status of the Telnet and Web access services.
To display the current access services status:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame surrounds the device image.
2. From the main menu, select Options.
3. Select Access.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the System Parameters 3-17
Figure 3-10. Access Dialog Box
Table 3-7. Access Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO/RW)
Telnet Access The current Telnet access status, for
Telnet control
Enable
Disable
Web Access The current Web access status, for
Web applications
Enable
Disable
Configuring the Syslog Parameters
All system events are logged. To allow logging/sharing of system events on a server instead of internally, the Syslog server parameters must first be configured.
To configure the Syslog:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame surrounds the device image and the main menu becomes available.
2. From the main menu, select Configuration > Syslog;
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-18 Setting the System Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-11. Syslog Parameters
Table 3-8. Syslog Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
Logging Status Determines whether logging to the Syslog
server is enabled or disabled. When
disabled, ACE-3100, ACE-3200 logs the
events internally.
Enable
Disable
Server IP Address IP address of the server IP address format
Server UDP Port Port number 1 to 65535
Device UDP Port Port number 1 to 65535
Facility Select the facility by name Local1 to Local7
Severity Level Only events with a severity that equals or
exceeds the selected severity level are
sent to the syslog.
Critical
Major
Minor
Warning
Event
Info
Debug
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-19
3.2 Setting the Operational Parameters
This section describes:
• Configuring Ethernet Ports
• Configuring E1/T1 Ports
• Configuring ATM-155 Ports
• Setting the Protection Parameters
• Defining the Clock Source
• Configuring PPPoE Entities
• Setting Abis Optimization
• Setting LAN-to-LAN Bridging
• Configuring ATM Parameters
• Configuring Bridge Parameters
• Configuring Router Parameters
• Configuring MPLS Parameters
• Configuring Multiservice over PSN Parameters.
Configuring Ethernet Ports
Two options are available for Ethernet ports:
• Viewing Ethernet Port Information
• Configuring Ethernet Port Parameters
To access the Ethernet port options:
1. Double-click the ETH port on the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 device image.
Figure 3-12. ETH Port Dialog Box
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-20 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
2. Click <ETHERNET>.
A light blue frame appears around the ETHERNET layer’s label, and the top menu bar becomes available.
When the ETHERNET layer is not selected, the ETH Port menu bar is disabled.
Viewing Ethernet Port Information
To view the Ethernet port information:
• From the Configuration menu of the Ethernet Port menu bar, select Port Info.
Figure 3-13. Ethernet Port Configuration Menu
The Port Info dialog box appears and displays the Ethernet port information.
Figure 3-14. Ethernet Port Info Dialog Box
Table 3-9. Ethernet Port Info Parameters
Parameter Description Possible values (RO)
Port The Ethernet port of which details
are displayed
ETH 1
ETH 2
MNG-ETH
MAC address The port’s MAC address MAC address format
Mode The port’s mode Half-Duplex
Full-Duplex
Default: Full-Duplex
Note
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-21
Parameter Description Possible values (RO)
Rate (Mbps) 10, 100
Default: 100
Status Connection status Connected
Not connected
Configuring Ethernet Port Parameters
To configure the Ethernet port parameters:
1. From the Configuration menu of the ETH Port menu bar, select Parameters.
Figure 3-15. Ethernet Port Parameters Dialog Box
2. Configure the parameters as required for the Ethernet port (see Table 3-10), and click <Set>.
The Ethernet port configuration takes effect.
Table 3-10. Ethernet Port Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO/RW)
Port The Ethernet port of which details
are displayed
ETH 1
ETH 2
MNG-ETH
(Read Only)
Port Activation The port activation state Enable
Disable
Auto Negotiation The autonegotioation state Enable
Disable
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-22 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO/RW)
Max Capability
Advertised
The maximum advertised capability
This field is disabled when
autonegotiation is disabled
The displayed value is according to
M=1 (Max bit equals 1)
10BaseT Half-Duplex
10BaseT Full-Duplex
100BaseT Half-Duplex
100BaseT Full-Duplex
Default Type The port’s default type
This field is disabled when
autonegotiation is enabled
10BaseT Half-Duplex
10BaseT Full-Duplex
100BaseT Half-Duplex
100BaseT Full-Duplex (Read
Only)
Configuring E1/T1 Ports
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 includes E1/T1 multiservice ports (4 or 8/16) that can be configured to work in ATM UNI/IMA or TDM mode, per user configuration. This Any-Service-Any-Port framework enables high flexibility in deployment within various backhaul solutions.
The E1 interfaces are available with balanced or unbalanced connectors (via an optional RJ-45 to BNC adapter cable).
To access the E1/T1 port options:
1. Double-click a E1/T1 Port in the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
The E1/T1 Port dialog box appears.
2. In the E1/T1 Port dialog box, click the E1/T1 layer.
A light blue frame appears around the layer’s label, and the top menu bar becomes available.
Figure 3-16. E1/T1 Port Dialog Box – UNI Mode
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-23
When no layer is selected, the E1/T1 Port top menu bar is disabled.
Setting E1 Parameters
To configure an E1 port:
• From the Configuration menu of the E1 Port menu bar, select Parameters.
Figure 3-17. Configuration Menu
Figure 3-18. E1 Port Parameters Dialog Box
Table 3-11. E1 Port Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO/RW)
Port The E1 port number E1 1-4 (Read only)
Mode The mode of operation set for this port UNI, CES-ATM,
CES-PSN, Abis
IMA Link (Read only)
Note
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-24 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO/RW)
Port Activation Enable/disable the E1 port in both
directions – Rx and Tx. When the port is
disabled, the Tx and Rx paths are
disabled.
No log file events or traps are sent from
this port upon physical layer events. It is
possible to deactivate the port even if XC
exists. However, it is not possible to
deactivate it if it was assigned to an IMA
group.
Enable
Disable
Default: Disable
Rx Sensitivity Determines the maximum attenuation of
the received signal that can be
compensated for by the interface’s Rx
path
Low
High
Default: Low
Line Type The E1 line type CRC4 enabled
CRC4 disabled
Unframed
Transmit Clock
Source
This variable indicates the variety of the
E1/T1 line implementing this circuit. The
type of circuit affects the number of bits
per second that the circuit can
reasonably carry, as well as the
interpretation of the usage and error
statistics.
Internal
Reference
Loopback
Default: Loopback
(This field is Read
Only when the port is
in IMA mode and
when the link is
associated with an
IMA group.)
Idle code Byte pattern of the data
received/transmitted in the T1 idle
timeslots (only for allocated timeslots
00–FF (hexadecimal)
Default: 7E
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 performs the following E1 validations:
• Checks whether the Idle Code parameter value is out of range. If so, an error message appears.
• Checks whether the Port Activation parameter was changed to Disable when assigned to an IMA Group. If so, an error message appears.
Setting T1 Parameters
To configure a T1 port:
• From the Configuration menu of the T1 Port menu bar, select Parameters.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-25
Figure 3-19. T1 Port Parameters Dialog Box
Table 3-12. T1 Port Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO/RW)
Port The T1 port number 1-4
Mode The mode of operation set for this port UNI, CES-ATM,
CES-PSN, Abis
IMA Link (Read only)
Port Activation Enables/disables the T1 port in both
directions, Rx and Tx. When the port is
disabled, Tx and Rx paths are disabled.
Neither log file events nor traps are
sent from this port upon physical layer
events. It is possible to deactivate the
port even if XC exists. However, it is
not possible if it was assigned to an
IMA group.
Enable
Disable
Default: Disable
Line Type The T1 line type ESF
Unframed
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-26 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO/RW)
Transmit Clock
Source
This variable indicates the type of
E1/T1 Line implementing this circuit.
The type of circuit affects the number
of bits per second that the circuit can
reasonably carry, as well as the
interpretation of the usage and error
statistics.
Internal
Reference
Loopback
Default: Loopback
(This field is Read Only
when the port is in IMA
mode and when the link
is associated with IMA
Group.)
Line Code This parameter describes the type of
Zero Code Suppression used on this
interface, which in turn affects a
number of its characteristics. B7ZS and
AMI codes are not valid if IMA or UNI
logical ports were configured for the
T1 port.
B8ZS (Read Only)
Line Mode T1 operation mode DSU
CSU
Default: DSU
Line Length (ft) The length of the E1/T1 line in DSU
mode
0–133; 134–266;
267–399; 400–533;
534–655
Default: 0–133
Enabled only when Line
Mode = DSU
Tx Gain (dB) The gain of the E1/T1 line in CSU mode 0, -7.5, -15, -22.5 in
CSU mode
Default: 0
Enabled only when Line
Mode = CSU
Restore Time Used to change the synchronization
algorithms and reduce the time
required for the port to return to
normal operation after local loss of
synchronization (LOF event)
1 - complies with ITU-T
Recommendation G.732
protocol.
10 - complies with
AT&T TR-62411
requirements
Default: 1
Idle code (hex)
Edit-box
Byte pattern of the data
received/transmitted in the T1 idle
timeslots (only for allocated timeslots)
00 – FF (hexadecimal)
Default: 7E
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-27
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO/RW)
Scramble The E1/T1 line's scramble mode
This field does not appear when Mode
= CES.
Enable
Disable
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 checks whether Unframed appears when the T1 mode is set to UNI/IMA link. If so, an error message appears and no changes can take effect.
Configuring ATM-155 Ports
The ATM-155 (155 Mbps) is an optional fiber optic interface. It performs physical layer and ATM mapping into STM-1/OC-3c.
Accessing the SONET/SDH Layer
To configure the SONET/SDH layer of an ATM-155 port:
1. Double-click the ATM-155 port in the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
Figure 3-20. ATM-155 Port Dialog Box
2. In the ATM-155 Port dialog box, click <SONET/SDH>.
A light blue frame appears around the SONET/SDH layer.
Note
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-28 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-21. ATM-155 Port – SONET/SDH Layer Selected
3. From the Configuration menu of the ATM-155 Port menu bar, select Parameters.
Figure 3-22. ATM-155 Port Parameters Dialog Box
4. Configure the required parameters in the editable fields (see Table 3-13), and click <Set>.
The system validates the port parameters. Once validated, the changes take effect.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-29
Table 3-13. ATM-155 Port Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW/RO)
Port Port type and number ATM-155 1–2
(Read only)
Port Activation Enable/disable the ATM-155 port
in both directions, Rx and Tx.
When the port is disabled, Tx and
Rx paths are disabled.
Enable
Disable
Transmit Clock Source Source of the Tx clock Loopback (APS inactive
only)
Internal
Reference
FrameType The frame type SONET
SDH
RS-BIP RS or Section BIP error threshold.
“RS BIP” in SDH frame type;
“Section BIP” in SONET frame type
1–8000 (errors/sec)
Default: 2400
MS-BIP Line BIP error threshold.
“MS BIP” in SDH frame type; “Line
BIP” in SONET frame type
1–8000 (errors/sec)
Default: 2400
HP-BIP Path BIP error threshold
“HP BIP” in SDH frame type; “Path
BIP” in SONET frame type
1–8000 (errors/sec)
Default: 2400
MS-FEBE Line FEBE error threshold
“MS FEBE” in SDH frame type;
“Line FEBE” in SONET frame type
1–8000 (errors/sec)
Default: 2400
HP-FEBE Path FEBE error threshold
“HP FEBE” in SDH frame type;
“Path FEBE” in SONET frame type
1–8000 (errors/sec)
Default: 2400
• ACE-3100, ACE-3200 checks whether any of the Active Alarm Thresholds are out of range. If so, an error message appears and no change takes effect.
• If Port Activation is changed to Disable and the device is managed through this port, disabling the port disconnects the management.
• When APS is active, the Port Parameters dialog box for working port 2 (e.g., ATM-155 1) is read only. You can copy the configuration of working port 1 to working port 2 (e.g., ATM-155 1 to ATM-155 2).
Note
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-30 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Accessing the ATM Layer
To configure the ATM layer of an ATM-155 port:
1. Double-click the ATM-155 Port in the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
Figure 3-23. ATM-155 Port Dialog Box
2. In the ATM-155 Port dialog box, click <ATM>.
A light blue frame appears around the ATM layer.
3. From the Configuration menu of the ATM-155 Port menu bar, select Parameters.
Figure 3-24. ATM-155 ATM Layer
4. Configure the parameters for the port as required.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-31
Table 3-14. ATM-155 ATM Port Physical Layer Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO/RW)
Port The ATM-155 port number ATM-155 1–2 (Read
Only)
Type The ATM-155 layer ATM (Read Only)
Output Rate
(cell/sec)
The port’s cell output (Tx) rate 100-353208
OAM Cell
Generation
The OAM cell generation mode for the
ATM layer.
For more information about OAM cell
generation, see the ACE-3100, ACE-
3200 Installation and Operation
Manual.
Enable
Disable
APS is active, the Port Parameters dialog box for working port 2 (e.g., ATM 155 1) is read only. You can copy the configuration of working port 1 to working port 2 (e.g., ATM-155 1 to ATM-155 2).
Setting the Protection Parameters
Automatic protection switching (APS) is a link-level protection mechanism for ensuring service continuity in the case of interface failure/error.
In ACE-3100, ACE-3200, the STM-1/OC-3c interfaces can be configured to work in APS mode, in which both interfaces transmit simultaneously over a working fiber and a protection fiber.
Viewing the APS Statistics
To view the APS Statistics:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame surrounds the device image and the main menu becomes available.
2. From the main menu, select Statistics.
3. Select Protection > APS.
Note
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-32 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-25. APS Statistics Table dialog box
You can click <Refresh> to retrieve and display the most current APS information. Table 3-15 summarizes the parameters that appear in the dialog box.
Table 3-15. APS Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Current Number of
Entries
The current number of APS groups
defined in the APS table.
Maximum Number
of Entries
The maximum number of APS groups
that can be defined.
Group ID The group ID of the APS String of 32
characters
Mode The APS operation mode 1+1 Optimized
Bi-directional
1+1 Compatible
Bi-directional
Working Port The working port corresponding to
ATM-155 1
ATM-155 1
Protection Port The working port corresponding to
ATM-155 2
ATM-155 2
Revertive Whether the Revertive mode is enabled,
i.e. – whether the master clock will
return to be the system clock after a
period of unavailability
Yes
No
Default: No
Wait To Restore
(sec)
The Wait to Restore time 1–720
Default: 300
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-33
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Switch Command The APS switch command menu. See
Applying and Clearing APS Switch Commands.
None (initial state)
Clear
Forced Switch
Lockout
Force Switch to
Working
Force Switch to
Protection
Manual Switch to
Working
Manual Switch to
Protection
Lockout of Protection
Removing APS
The APS protection can be deactivated when required.
To remove a APS protection:
• From the Configuration menu, select Protection.
The APS table is displayed.
Figure 3-26. APS Table
• Select the row of the descriptor you want to remove, and click <Remove>.
The descriptor is removed from the list.
The Remove button is disabled when no entry is selected.
Note
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-34 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Applying and Clearing APS Switch Commands
You can use the Switch Command button to apply either one of two APS switch commands at one time. Once a command is applied, you cannot apply another command unless you clear the command first.
To apply a command:
1. In the APS Table dialog box (see Figure 3-25), select an entry in the table.
The Switch Command button is enabled.
2. Select a command from the Switch Command menu. See Table 3-16 for a description of the switch commands.
The switch command is applied.
Table 3-16. Switch Commands
Switch Command Description Mode
Force Switch The switch command transfers service
from the working port to the
protection port, and vice versa.
1+1 Optimized
Bi-Directional;
1+1 Compatible
Bi-Directional
Manual Switch The switch command transfers service
from the working port to the
protection port, and vice versa. Manual
Switch is of lower Priority than a Force
Switch.
1+1 Compatible
Bi-Directional
Lockout Lockout freezes the transmitted K-
bytes and selector position (the traffic
is taken from the port which is
currently primary) until the lockout is
cleared. Lockout is considered a local
request, which is not signaled across
the K-bytes.
1+1 Optimized
Bi-Directional;
1+1 Compatible
Bi-Directional
To clear a command:
1. In the APS Table dialog box (see Figure 3-25), select the entry to which a switch command is currently applied.
The Switch Command button is enabled.
2. Select Switch Command > Clear.
The applied command is cleared and the command options “force switch” and “Lockout” are enabled.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-35
Defining the Clock Source
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 requires a distinct clock source and a defined reference clock in order to fulfill its purpose in a given backhauling application.
Accordingly, you have to select the clock source type, as well as the ports of the primary and secondary reference clocks, used as the source clocks for all other E1/T1 and STM-1/OC-3c ports.
The fallback clock is used as the secondary clock source of ACE-3100, ACE-3200 in cases when the master clock is down or unreachable.
The master clock is used as the primary clock source of ACE-3100, ACE-3200 and must be set prior to starting any backhauling service. The master clock can be derived from either the RX clock of a specific interface, an IMA group or the station clock or a PSN.
To access the Clock options:
• From the Configuration menu, select Clock. > Source
The Clock Source dialog box opens.
Figure 3-27. Clock Source Dialog Box
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-36 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Table 3-17. Clock Source Options
Parameter Description Possible Values
Source The clock source type RX Clock – the clock is
derived from the incoming
traffic of one of the unit's
ports.
Recovered – the clock is
recovered from the PSN.
None – No port is assigned
to be a reference clock
source. This value is not
available for the primary
clock.
Port type Type of the master clock port. Visible only if
RX Clock was selected as the clock source.
Note:
The primary and secondary clock ports must be of the same type (both E1/T1, STM-1/OC-3c or IMA group),
If the port type is IMA group, only an existing IMA group with at least one link that is assigned to the group may be selected.
E1/T1 – One of the E1 or T1
ports
PSN – the clock is
recovered from a dedicated
PW
ATM-155 – One of the
STM-1/OC-3c ports
IMA group – Timing
Reference Link (TRL) of an
IMA group is to be assigned
as a source for the master
clock.
Default: ATM-155
Port number Number of the port that is used as the
master clock.
Note:
It is not permitted to set both the master and fallback clocks on the same port number.
IMA group can be chosen only if it has a TRL (timing reference link).
Pseudowire channel number must be typed in manually if PSN port type is chosen.
1–4/8/16 for one of the
E1/T1 ports
1–2 for one of the ATM-
155 ports
1–4/8/16 for one of the
IMA groups
1 (non-selectable) for the
station clock port
Pseudowire channel number
for PSN clock
Station clock
type
The type of the station clock's circuit line, if
the station clock was selected to serve as
the reference clock.
E1
T1
Default: E1
Recovered ID The clock recovery entity ID. Visible only if
Recovered was selected as the clock source.
1
Recovered Access the PSN clock recovery options,
provided that the clock recovery hardware
component is installed in the unit and that
the appropriate software license is installed.
Rx Clock
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-37
Parameter Description Possible Values
Master Clock Enter the master (primary) clock settings
Fallback clock Enter the fallback (secondary) clock
settings.
Setting the PSN Clock Recovery Parameters
When equipped with a hardware clock recovery component and the required software license, ACE-3100, ACE-3200 is able to recover clock streams that originate from the packet-switched network. A remote PSN clock distribution device, usually located at the BSC/RNC side, distributes the uniquely-formatted clock streams which ACE-3100, ACE-3200 can recover. The clock recovery parameters are set on the Recovered Clock dialog box.
To access the clock recovery options:
• From the Clock menu, select Recovered.
The Recovered Clock dialog is displayed.
Figure 3-28. Recovered Clock dialog box
Table 3-18. Recovered Clock Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
ID Defines the clock recovery entry 1
Administrative
Status
Enable or disable the clock recovery
functionality. Once enabled, the clock
recovery is immediately activated.
Must be Down-disabled to make changes
Up
Down
Default: Up
Type Type/method of the clock recovery. Adaptive
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-38 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
PW Number of the specific PW on which the
clock stream is carried.
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 uses up to 32 PWs
for data, up to 32 PWs for clock
distribution, and up to 2 PWs for clock
recovery.
1–66
Source quality The required accuracy level of the
recovered clock source.
Note:
Stratum 1 and Stratum 2 are possible
only when the local oscillator type is
OCXO.
Stratum 3 and Stratum 4 are available
only when the selected network type
is Type B (see below).
The remote clock distribution device
may generate up to a 5% packet loss
when distributing the clock over a
PSN.
The source quality selection cannot
be changed when Activity is set to
Enable.
Stratum 1
Stratum 2
Stratum 3
Stratum 3E
Stratum 4
Default: Stratum 1
Network type Type of the PSN from which the clock is
recovered. Switch-based Layer-2
networks are regarded as Type A, and
router-based networks as Type B.
Type A
Type B
Type C
Type D
Default: Type B
Clock State Clock operation. Free Run
Frequency Acquisition
Rapid Phase Lock
Fine Phase Lock
Holdover
Adding and Changing a Clock Recovery Source
The clock recovery algorithm is based on the packet inter-arrival time. In order to compensate for packet delay variation and network jitter, the clock recovery mechanism has a fixed-size jitter buffer. In addition, the clock stream can be prioritized per configuration.
The quality of the recovered clock is defined by five compliance levels: Stratum-1, Stratum-2, Stratum-3, Struaum-3E and Stratum-4. The compliance level is user-configurable.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-39
To add a recovered clock:
1. Click <Add> in the Recovered clock dialog box.
2. Define recovered clock parameters, see Table 3-18
3. Set Administrative Status to Down in order to allow changes
4. Click <Set> to apply changes.
Figure 3-29. Add Recovered Clock
To change a recovered clock:
1. Click <Change> in the Recovered clock dialog box.
2. Edit recovered clock parameters (see Table 3-18).
3. Set Administrative Status to Down in order to allow changes
4. Click <Set> to apply changes.
5. Set Administrative Status to Up in order to enable recovered clock.
Figure 3-30. Change Recovered Clock
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-40 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Configuring PPPoE Entities
This stage consists of configuring the PPPoE protocol parameters that are configured in the logical layer. ACE-3100, ACE-3200 allows initiation of PPPoE sessions for retrieving IP addresses of all data, voice and management sources, to allow HSPDA connectivity in a variety of DSL-based cellular backhaul applications.
To access PPPoE protocol options:
• From the Configuration menu select PPPoE.
PPPoE table is displayed.
Figure 3-31. PPPoE Table
Table 3-19. PPPoE Table Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
ID The identifying number of the PPPoE
logical entity
1–4
Access Concentrator
name
Name of the access concentrator (AC)
server with which the PPPoE session
should be established.
If the AC name is not specified, ACE-3100,
ACE-3200 attempts to establish the PPPoE
session with the router whose response
was first received.
Up to 32 characters
Default: NULL
Service name Name of the service requested for the
PPPoE session.
Note: If the AC server cannot support the requested service, the session is not established.
Up to 32 characters
Default: NULL
Username The user name to be used in the PPP
session. The authentication mechanism
Up to 32
characters,
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-41
Parameter Description Possible Values
(PAP, CHAP or none) is determined by the
PPP server.
case-sensitive
Default: NULL
Port Number of the specific port used for the
PPPoE session
1 or 2
Password The user name to be used in the PPP
session. Each typed character is masked
by an asterisk.
The password is available only if Access
Concentrator is set to NULL.
Up to 32
characters,
case-sensitive
Default: NULL
Confirm password Retype the password typed above Must be identical to
the Password string
Interface type The interface that is used for the PPPoE
session
Ethernet
The PPPoE parameters cannot be changed dynamically (on-the-fly).
Adding or Changing a PPPoE Entity
To add or change a PPPoE entity:
1. Click the Add button.
The Add PPPoE dialog box opens.
Figure 3-32. Add PPPoE Parameters
2. Enter/edit the PPPoE parameters (for more information see Table 3-19).
3. Click Set.
Note
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-42 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
The entity is set with the newly entered parameters.
Removing a PPPoE Entity
To remove a PPPoE entity:
1. In the PPPoE table, select the PPPoE entity to be removed.
The Remove button becomes enabled
2. Click the Remove button.
A confirmation message appears: 'Removing PPPoE entry'.
3. Click OK.
Viewing the PPPoE Session Status
To access PPPoE status:
• From the PPPoE table select Status.
The Status dialog is displayed.
Figure 3-33. PPPoE Status
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-43
Adding a Virtual MAC Address (Bridge Configuration)
Virtual MAC addresses are MAC addresses that are not associated to a physical port.
A global process supports virtual MAC addresses that are kept on the flash.
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 devices need to supply more MAC addresses then are assembled on boards for dynamic entities (whose number may not be fixed) such as PPPoE.
Since existing devices and some of our new devices (LA-130 NG) do not have flash on board, those MAC address are kept on a file in the DOC.
To add a MAC address:
1. From the Configuration menu select Bridge.
The Bridge menu appears.
Figure 3-34. Bridge Menu
2. From the Bridge menu, select MAC Table…
The MAC Table dialog is displayed.
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-44 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-35. MAC Table
Table 3-20. MAC Table Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
Bridge Type VLAN Aware
VLAN ID ID of the VLAN within the range that was
previously defined in the MAC table menu.
0-4094
MAC Address The MAC Address that was previously
defined in the MAC table menu.
00-00-00-00-00-00
to
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
Received Bridge Port The number of the Bridge Port that was
previously defined in the MAC table menu. 0-3
Status The status of the device of which the
address is displayed.
Dynamic
Static
Learned
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-45
3. Click Add.
The Add Static Entry dialog is displayed.
Figure 3-36. Add MAC Address
4. Complete the MAC address, port number and VLAN ID, and click Apply.
5. Click Close.
Setting Abis Optimization
ACE3200 supports Abis configuration. The Abis optimization capabilities include:
• Automatic timeslot detection
• Automatic codec detection fro FR, EFR, AMR, and HR-AMR
• Dynamic GPRS/EDGE
• Silence suppression when DTX is enabled, using a smart packet drop (SPD) mechanism
• Voice and data compression
To configure Abis mode:
1. From the Configuration table select E1 Mode….
The E1 Mode dialog is displayed.
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-46 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-37. E1 Mode
2. Select the E1 port to be changed to Abis mode.
3. Click Mode.
The Mode menu is displayed.
Figure 3-38. E1 Port Mode Menu
4. Select Abis to change the mode.
5. Click Apply to apply the change.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-47
Setting LAN-to-LAN Bridging
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 supports LAN-to-LAN bridging to allow backhauling of Ethernet traffic originating from the cellular site/Node B.
Two modes of operation are supported:
• Transparent – frames from the user port are forwarded to the PSN "as is".
• VLAN stacking – a VLAN ID is added to any frame that is received on the user port, and then forwarded to the network port. When received from the PSN, the VLAN tag is removed and the frame is forwarded to the user port.
To view the current bridges
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame surrounds the device image and the main menu becomes available.
2. From the main menu, select Configuration > Bridge.
3. Select Traffic Ports.
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-48 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-39. Bridge Ports Table
To add a LAN-to-LAN bridge:
1. Click <Add>.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-49
Figure 3-40. Adding a LAN-to-LAN Bridge Port
Table 3-21. LAN-to-LAN Bridge Port Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Number Number of the bridge port which details
are currently displayed.
1–3
Default: 1
Port Type of the bridge port Ethernet
Host
Default: Host
Administrative
Status
The port activation state Up
Down
Default: Up
Ingress Filtering When enabled, ACE-3100, ACE-3200
discards incoming frames which VID is
not included in the port's member set.
When disabled, the port accepts all
incoming frames.
Enable
Disable
Default: Disable
Accept Frame Type When set to 'All', both tagged and
untagged received frames are accepted
and assigned to the port's VID.
When set to 'Tagged only', untagged
received frames are discarded.
Relevant only in VLAN-aware mode and
for Ethernet port type.
All
Tagged only
Default: All
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-50 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Port VID / Stacking
VID
A VLAN ID that is either assigned to
untagged frames received on a
VLAN-aware bridge, or used for stacking
on tagged frames.
Relevant only in VLAN-aware mode and
for Ethernet port type.
1–4094
Default: 1
Default Priority Tag The priority that the frame receives by
default when:
• An untagged frame is received
• Stacking is performed.
Relevant only in VLAN-aware mode and
for Ethernet port type.
0–7
Default: 0
Maximal Number of
MAC Address
Max number of MAC addresses that are
kept for the bridge port in the MAC table
0–512
Default: 512
Egress Tag
Handling
Indicates whether the higher layer
(external) VLAN tag should be stripped
(removed) or not before the frame exits
the bridge port. The tag is removed if
'Stripping' is selected.
Relevant only in VLAN-aware mode and
for Ethernet port type.
Stripping
None
Default: None
Ingress Tag
Handling
Indicates whether VLAN stacking should
be performed when a frame enters the
bridge port. An extra VLAN tag is added
to the frame if 'Stacking' is selected.
Relevant only in VLAN-aware mode and
for Ethernet port type.
Stacking
None
Default: None
Copy Original
Priority
When VLAN stacking is enabled (see
above), indicates whether the priority of
the added VLAN tag should be copied
from the original VLAN tag, or taken
from the default priority tag. Copying of
the original is performed when 'Yes' is
selected.
Relevant only in VLAN-aware mode and
when 'Stacking' is selected above.
Yes
No
Default: No
2. Click Apply to add the LAN-to-LAN bridge.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-51
Configuring ATM Parameters
The ATM parameters include:
• Configuring Traffic Descriptors
• Configuring OAM Parameters
• Configuring IMA Groups
• Configuring ATM Cross-Connections (XCs)
• Configuring CES Cross Connections (XCs).
Configuring Traffic Descriptors
The Traffic Descriptor option allows you to view and modify traffic descriptor information, such as service category and values of shaping parameters, such as PCR and SCR.
You can define a set of traffic types that characterize each VP/VC. The applicable parameters depend on the selected service category.
The following table lists the parameters and types for each service category and specifies which shaping parameters are relevant for each service category. The traffic descriptor type that appears in the table is not user-configurable, and therefore is always read-only.
Table 3-22. Service Category and Shaping Parameters
Service Category Shaping Parameters
CBR PCR (cells/sec) for CLP=0+1
CDVT (μsec)
CBR CES PCR (cells/sec) for CLP=0+1
CDVT (μsec)
VBR1 PCR (cells/sec) for CLP=0+1
SCR (cells/sec) for CLP=0+1
MBS (cells)
CDVT (μsec)
UBR PCR (cells/sec) for CLP=0+1
CDVT (μsec)
UBR+ PCR (cells/sec) for CLP=0+1
CDVT (μsec)
MDCR (cells/sec)
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-52 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Viewing Traffic Descriptors
To view traffic descriptor information:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame surrounds the device image and the main menu becomes available.
2. From the main menu, select Configuration > ATM.
3. Select Traffic Descriptor.
Figure 3-41. Traffic Descriptor Table Dialog Box
Entries that are shaded blue cannot be modified or removed. You can click <Refresh> to retrieve and display the most current traffic descriptor information. The following table lists and describes the parameters that appear in the dialog box.
Table 3-23. Traffic Descriptor Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Current Number of
Entries
Current number of traffic descriptors 1–256
Maximum Number
of Entries
Maximum number of traffic descriptors
that can be defined
256
Index Traffic descriptor serial number
1 is a default traffic descriptor and
cannot be deleted or changed.
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 supports up to 256
traffic descriptors
A traffic descriptor cannot be deleted
while it is being used in connections
1–99999
Default: the lowest
available value
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-53
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Service Category The service category for the currently
configured traffic descriptor
The service category is selectable only
when creating a traffic descriptor, not
for existing traffic descriptors
CBR
VBR1
UBR+
UBR
Default: UBR
Shaping Mode Determines whether the traffic
descriptor is shaped or not
The shaping mode cannot be changed or
configured for UBR service category
Unshaped mode cannot be configured
for VBR1 and UBR+ service categories
Shaped
Unshaped
Default: Unshaped
PCR Peak Cell Rate in cells per second
PCR cannot be changed while a VP or VC
XC is using it
For the unshaped mode, this parameter
is set to 0
100–353208
Default: 100
CDVT Cell Delay Variation Tolerance in μsec.
CDVT cannot be changed while VP or VC
XC is using CDVT
For unshaped mode, this parameter is
set to 0
1–80000
Default: 1
SCR Sustainable Cell Rate in cells per second
SCR cannot be changed while VP or VC
XC is using it
For unshaped mode, this parameter is
set to 0
100–353208
Must be smaller than
PCR
Default: 100
MBS Max Burst Size in cells
MBS cannot be changed while VP or VC
XC uses PCR
For unshaped mode, this parameter is
set to 0
1–8388608
Default: 1
MBS Max Burst Size in cells
MBS cannot be changed while VP or VC
XC uses PCR
For unshaped mode, this parameter is
set to 0
1–8388608
Default: 1
MDCR Max Desired Cell Rate in cells
per-second. MDCR cannot be changed
while VP or VC XC uses MDCR For
unshaped mode this parameter is set to
0.
100–353208
Must be smaller than
PCR
Default: 100
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-54 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
• The ‘--‘ symbol appears for all shaping parameters when shaping mode is unshaped. ‘--‘ is also displayed for a certain shaping parameter when it is irrelevant to the traffic descriptor service category.
• Traffic descriptors that are used by a connection are colored in cyan. Unused traffic descriptors are colored in gray.
• You cannot add or remove CBR CES traffic descriptors.
Adding Traffic Descriptors
In the Traffic Descriptor dialog box you can add or remove traffic descriptors as necessary.
To add a traffic descriptor:
1. In the Traffic Descriptor Table dialog box (see Figure 3-41), click <Add>.
Figure 3-42. Add Traffic Descriptor Dialog Box
The Add button in the Traffic Descriptor Table dialog box is disabled when the traffic descriptor table is full (256 entries).
2. Enter the required parameters in the editable fields (see Table 3-24) and click <Apply>.
The system validates the new traffic descriptor (see Modifying Traffic Descriptors). Once validated, the traffic descriptor is added to the table.
Note
Note
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-55
Table 3-24. Traffic Descriptor Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW)
Index The traffic descriptor serial number.
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 supports up to
256 traffic descriptors.
1–99999
Default: The lowest
available value
Service Category The service category for the currently
configured traffic descriptor.
CBR
VBR1
UBR+
UBR
Default: UBR
Shaping Mode Determines whether the Traffic
descriptor is shaped or not. Shaping
mode cannot be configured for UBR
service category
Unshaped mode cannot be configured
for VBR1 and UBR+ service categories
Shaped
Unshaped
Default: Unshaped
PCR Peak Cell Rate in cells per second
For the unshaped mode this parameter
is set to 0
100–353208
(Read/Write – if Shaped
mode is selected)
CVDT Cell Delay Variation Tolerance in μsec
For unshaped mode, this parameter is
set to 0
1–80000
(Read/Write – if Shaped
mode is selected)
SCR Sustainable Cell Rate in cells per
second
For unshaped mode, this parameter is
set to 0
100–353208
Must be smaller than
PCR
(Read/Write – if Shaped
mode is selected)
MBS Max Burst Size in cells
For unshaped mode, this parameter is
set to 0
1–8388608
(Read/Write – if Shaped
mode is selected)
MDCR Max Desired Cell Rate in cells
For unshaped mode, this parameter is
set to 0
100–353208
Must be smaller than
PCR
(Read/Write – if Shaped
mode is selected)
Modifying Traffic Descriptors
To modify a traffic descriptor:
1. In the Traffic Descriptor Table dialog box (see Figure 3-41), click <Change>.
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-56 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-43. Change Traffic Descriptor Dialog Box
2. Modify the parameters as required in the editable fields (see Figure 3-43), and click <Set>.
The system validates the changes.
Traffic Descriptor Validation
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 performs the following traffic descriptor validations:
• Index – Checks whether the traffic descriptor value already exists, and whether its edited value is out of range. If so, an error message appears.
• Number of Entries – Checks whether the table is full (256 entries). If so, an error message appears.
• Shaping Parameters – Checks whether any of the shaping parameters is out of range. If so, an error message appears.
• SCR vs. PCR – Checks whether the SCR is equal to or smaller than the PCR. If not, an error message appears.
• PCR vs. MDCR – Checks whether the MDCR is smaller or equal to the PCR. If not, an error message appears.
• MDCR vs. PCR-100 – Checks whether the MDCR value is lower than the PCR-100 value. If not, an error message appears.
Removing Traffic Descriptors
To remove a traffic descriptor:
• In the Traffic Descriptor Table dialog box (see Figure 3-41), select the row of the descriptor you want to remove, and click <Remove>.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-57
The descriptor is removed from the list.
• The Remove button is disabled when no entry is selected or when traffic descriptor number 1 is selected.
• A traffic descriptor cannot be deleted if it is being used by a connection.
Configuring OAM Parameters
The OAM configuration consists of:
• Configuring OAM Loopback Parameters
• Configuring OAM Descriptors.
Configuring OAM Loopback Parameters
The OAM loopback function allows ACE-3100, ACE-3200 to send OAM loopback cells in case of a link failure. The OAM loopback configuration menu allows you to define the loopback source address and failure threshold.
To configure OAM Loopback parameters:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
The light blue frame surrounds the device image and the main menu becomes available.
2. From the main menu, select Configuration > ATM.
3. Select OAM > Parameters.
Figure 3-44. OAM Parameter Dialog Box
You can click <Refresh> to retrieve and display the most current OAM parameter information. Table 3-26 lists and describes the parameters that appear in the dialog box.
Table 3-25. OAM Parameter Table Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW)
Loopback Source
Address (hex)
The address of the loopback source 0x0 – 0xFF
Note
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-58 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW)
Loopback Failure
Threshold
The number of loopback cells which
must be lost to declare a loopback
failure
1 – 16
Configuring OAM Descriptors
The OAM Descriptor Table dialog box allows you to configure OAM descriptors to be later used by different connections.
To view the currently defined OAM descriptors:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
The light blue frame surrounds the device image and the main menu becomes available.
2. From the main menu, select Configuration >ATM.
3. Select OAM > Descriptor…
Figure 3-45. OAM Descriptor Table Dialog Box
You can click <Refresh> to retrieve and display the most current OAM descriptor information. Table 3-26 lists and describes the parameters that appear in the dialog box.
Table 3-26. OAM Descriptor Table Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Current Number of
Entries
Current number of OAM descriptors 1–256
Maximum Number of
Entries
Maximum number of OAM
descriptors that can be defined
256
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-59
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Index
OAM descriptor serial number
1 is a default OAM descriptor and
cannot be deleted or changed
An OAM descriptor cannot be
changed if any connection is using
the OAM descriptor
1–256
OAM Mode The OAM mode of the descriptor
The OAM mode cannot be changed
if CC or loopback are on
End-to-End
Segment
Intermediate
Default: End-to-End
CC Direction OAM continuity check function
mode
CC cannot be configured when OAM
mode = Intermediate
None
Source
Sink
Both
Default: Both
Loopback Operation The OAM descriptor loopback
operation setting
Disabled when OAM mode =
Intermediate
On
Off
Default: Off
Loopback
Destination Address
(hex)
The OAM descriptor loopback
destination address
Disabled when Loopback Operation
= On
String of 16 bytes, Hex
Default: FF FF … FF
• OAM descriptors that are used by a connection are colored in cyan. Unused descriptors are colored in gray.
• OAM descriptors cannot be modified or removed.
Adding an OAM Descriptor
You can add or remove OAM descriptors from the OAM Descriptor Table as necessary.
To add an OAM descriptor:
1. In the OAM Descriptor Table dialog box (see Figure 3-45), click <Add>.
Note
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-60 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-46. Add OAM Descriptor Dialog Box
The Add button in the OAM Descriptor Table dialog box is disabled when the OAM Descriptor Table is full (256 entries).
2. Enter the required parameters in the editable fields (see Table 3-27) and click <Apply>.
The system validates the new OAM descriptor. Once validated, it is added to the table.
Table 3-27. OAM Descriptor Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW/RO)
Index OAM descriptor serial number
1–256
OAM Mode Mode of the OAM descriptor
Segment
Intermediate, End-to-End
Default: End-to-End
CC Direction OAM continuity check function mode
CC is disabled in case of intermediate
OAM mode
Source, None
Sink
Both
Default: None
Loopback Operation OAM loopback function mode Off
On
Default: None
Loopback Destination
Address (hex)
The OAM loopback address that is
transmitted on each OAM loopback
cell
16 bytes hexadecimal
string
Default: FF FF … FF
Note
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-61
OAM Descriptor Validation
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 performs the following OAM descriptor validations:
• Checks whether the table is full. If so, an error message appears.
• Checks whether the index value is out of range. If so, an error message appears.
• Checks whether the index value already exists in the table. If so, an error message appears.
Removing an OAM Descriptor
To remove an OAM descriptor:
• In the OAM Descriptor Table dialog box (see Figure 3-45),select the row of the descriptor you want to remove, and click <Remove>.
The descriptor is removed from the table.
The Remove button is disabled when no entry is selected.
Modifying an OAM Descriptor
To change an OAM descriptor:
• In the OAM Descriptor Table dialog box (see Figure 3-45), select the row of the descriptor you want to change, and click <Change>.
The Change OAM Descriptor dialog box opens. The Change OAM Descriptor dialog box is the same as the Add OAM Descriptor dialog box (see Figure 3-46 and Table 3-27), except that the Index parameter is read-only.
The Change button is disabled when no entry is selected.
Setting the E1/T1 OAM Cell Generation
When the E1/T1 port is working in UNI mode (as opposed to IMA mode), you can select the OAM cell generation mode for the ATM layer.
To configure OAM cell generation:
1. Double-click the E1/T1 Port in the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
The E1/T1 Port dialog box appears.
2. In the E1/T1 Port dialog box, click <ATM> (see Figure 3-16).
A light blue frame appears around the ATM layer's label.
3. From the Configuration menu of the E1/T1 Port menu bar, select Parameters.
Note
Note
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-62 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-47. Port Parameters Dialog Box
4. From the OAM Cell Generation drop-down list, select the required mode and click <Set>.
The selected mode takes effect.
Table 3-28. Port Parameters – ATM Layer
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO/RW)
Port Type and number of the E1/T1 Port E1/T1 1-4
(Read Only)
Mode The port’s current mode of operation ATM over UNI
(Read Only)
OAM Cell
Generation
The OAM cell generation mode for the
E1/T1 ATM layer.
For more information about OAM cell
generation, see the ACE-3100, ACE-
3200 Installation and Operation
Manual.
Enable
Disable
Configuring IMA Groups
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 supports IMA (Inverse Multiplexing over ATM) versions 1.0 and 1.1. It can bundle together up to 4 or 8/16 IMA groups, and up to 4/8/16 independent links (depending on number of E1/T1 ports) per IMA group.
The IMA Group Table dialog box allows you to configure group parameters, such as group serial number, and to activate or suspend IMA groups, links, and other parameters.
To view the currently defined IMA groups:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame surrounds the device image and the main menu becomes available.
2. From the main menu, select Configuration > ATM.
3. Select IMA Group Table.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-63
Figure 3-48. IMA Group Table Dialog Box
Table 3-29. IMA Group Table Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Current Number of
Entries
Current number of IMA groups 1–4
Maximum Number of
Entries
Maximum number of IMA groups that
can be defined
16
Number Group serial number 1–4
Default: The lowest
available group number
Min Tx Links Minimum number of TX links required
for the group to become operational
1–4
Default: 1
Min Rx Links Minimum number of RX links required
for the group to become operational
1–4
Default: 1
Group ID IMA group ID 0–255
Default: 0
Tx Frame Length
(cells)
TX frame length used by the IMA
group
32, 64, 128, 256
Default: 128
Max Differential
Delay (msec)
Maximum link delay tolerated 1–100
Default: 25
Blocking Shut down a specific group for any
reason other than insufficient links.
Block value is valid only when group
state is Active.
Block
Unblock
Default: Unblock
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-64 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
IMA Version Select the ATM Forum IMA
specification supported
1.0, 1.1
Default: 1.1
Common Tx Clock
Source
Group TX clock source Internal
Reference
Default: Internal
OAM Cell Generation Setting for generation of ATM OAM
cells in case of IMA group failure
Enabled
Disabled
Links in Group
Indicates which links (ports) are
associated with the group
1–4
Several values may
appear, separated by
commas and dashes.
You can click <Refresh> to retrieve and display the most current IMA group information.
You can click <Restart> to restart the IMA group.
<Restart> is disabled when Blocking = Block.
Adding an IMA Group
You can add IMA groups to the IMA Group Table.
To add an IMA group:
1. In the IMA Group Table dialog box, click <Add>.
Figure 3-49. Add IMA Group Dialog Box
Note
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-65
2. Configure the parameters in the editable fields as required (see Table 3-30) and click <Apply>.
The system validates the new IMA group (see IMA Group Validation). Once validated, the group is added to the table.
Table 3-30. Add IMA Group Table Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW)
Number Group serial number, derived from
the index
1–4
Default: The lowest
unused group number
Min Tx Links
Minimum number of TX links required
for the group to become operational
1–4
Default: 1
Min Rx Links Minimum number of RX links required
for the group to become operational
1–4
Default: 1
Group ID
IMA group ID 0–255
Default: 0
Tx Frame Length
(cells)
TX frame length used by the IMA
group
32, 64, 128, 256
Default: 128
Max Differential
Delay (msec)
Maximum link delay tolerated 1–100
Default: 25
IMA Version Selects the ATM Forum IMA
specification supported
1.0, 1.1
Default: 1.1
Common Tx Clock
Source
Group TX clock source Internal
Reference
Default: Reference
OAM Cell Generation Setting for generation of ATM OAM
cells in case of IMA group failure
Enabled
Disabled
Default: Disabled
Links in Group
Add/remove links to the IMA group by
clicking <…>.
1–4, several values may
appear
Default: Blank
Modifying an IMA Group
If necessary, you can modify an existing IMA group by changing the links of the IMA group.
To change the links of an IMA group:
1. From the IMA Group Table dialog box (see Figure 3-48), select the row of the IMA group whose links you want to modify.
2. Click <Change>.
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-66 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-50. Change IMA Group Dialog Box
The Change button is enabled only when an entry is selected.
3. Click <…> to edit the links via the Links Selection dialog box.
Table 3-31. Change IMA Group Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO/RW)
Number Group serial number 1–4
Min Tx Links
Minimum number of TX links
required for the group to become
operational
1–4
Min Rx Links
Minimum number of RX links
required for the group to become
operational
1–4
Group ID IMA group ID 0–255
Tx Frame Length
(cells)
TX frame length used by the IMA
group
32, 64, 128, 256
Max Differential
Delay (msec)
Maximum link delay tolerated 1–100
IMA Version Selects the ATM Forum IMA
specification supported
1.0, 1.1
Note
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-67
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO/RW)
Common Tx Clock
Source
Group TX clock source Internal
Reference
OAM Cell
Generation
Setting for generation of ATM OAM
cells in case of IMA group failure
Enabled
Disabled
Links in Group The current links in the group
Clicking <…> allows you to
add/remove links to/from the IMA
group.
1–4
(Read/Write)
IMA Group Validation
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 performs the following IMA group validation:
• Checks whether the table is full. If so, an error message appears.
• Checks whether the Mix Tx and Min Rx entries are equal. If not, an error message appears.
• Verifies all links in the group.
Selecting IMA Links for an IMA Group
The Links Selection dialog box (see Figure 3-51) displays a list of all E1/T1 port links that work in IMA mode, and allows you to add or remove IMA links to or from any defined IMA group.
A blue background for a list entry (row) indicates that the link is already associated with an IMA group. The number of the group to which the link is associated appears in the IMA Group column. The label 'Not in Group' and a gray/white background indicate that the link is free.
The Links Selection dialog box is invoked as explained in Modifying an IMA Group and in Adding an IMA Group.
The selected IMA link values and ranges are displayed in the Links in Group field/column that appears in the Change IMA Group, Add IMA Group, and IMA Group Table dialog boxes. For example, if the selected links are 1, 3, and 4, they are displayed as "1, 3-4".
Figure 3-51. Links Selection Dialog Box
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-68 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Table 3-32. Links Selection Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
IMA Link IMA link number 1-4
IMA Group Number of the group to which the
corresponding link belongs
1-4
Not in Group
Port Activation IMA link state of activation Enable
Disable
To add a link to the IMA group:
1. From the Link Selection dialog box, select the row of a link that is labeled ‘Not in Group’.
The Add to Group button becomes available.
The Add to Group button is disabled when Port Activation for the selected row is set to Disable.
2. Click <Add to Group>.
The selected row is colored yellow.
3. Click <OK>.
The IMA link is added to the IMA group.
To remove a link from the IMA group:
1. Select the row of the link that you want to remove.
The Remove from Group button becomes available.
2. Click <Remove from Group>.
The selected row is colored gray.
3. Click <OK>.
The IMA link is removed from the IMA group.
If you click <Cancel> instead of <OK>, the changes do not take effect.
Removing an IMA Group
You can remove IMA groups from the IMA Group Table dialog box.
To remove an IMA Group:
• From the IMA Groups Table dialog box (see Figure 3-48), select the group that you want to remove and click <Remove>.
IMA Group Validation
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 performs the following IMA group validations:
Note
Note
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-69
• Checks whether the IMA Group is used by a connection or as a Primary or Secondary clock reference to the devices. If so, an error message appears.
Blocking and Unblocking an IMA Group
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 allows you to block or unblock IMA groups. When blocked, the IMA group becomes inactive.
To block an IMA group:
1. From the IMA Group Table dialog box, select the group you want to block.
The Blocking button becomes available.
2. Click <Blocking> and select Block from the submenu.
Figure 3-52. Blocking Submenu
The selected IMA group becomes blocked.
To unblock an IMA group:
1. From the IMA Group Table, select a blocked IMA group.
2. Click <Blocking> and select Unblock from the submenu.
The selected IMA group returns to normal functionality.
Viewing IMA Group Status
You can view the status details of any IMA group.
To view the status of an IMA group:
1. From the IMA Group Table dialog box (see Figure 3-48), select the group whose details you want to view.
The Status button becomes available.
2. Click <Status>.
The IMA Group Status dialog box appears (see Figure 3-53) and displays the group's status details.
The IMA Group Status can also be accessed from the system level’s Statistics menu, using the following menu path:
• Statistics > IMA Group > Group Current and Intervals Statistics > Status
Note
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-70 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-53. IMA Group Status Dialog Box
Table 3-33. IMA Group Status Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Group IMA group number 1–16
Ne/Fe Current State The near-end (NE) and far-end (FE) current state.
Not configured – The group does not exist Not Configured
Start-up – The group is waiting for near-end or far-
end startup
Start-up
Start-up-Ack –Transitional state, when both groups
start-up to insufficient-links state
Start-up-Ack
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-71
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Config-Aborted (M) – The group has rejected the far-
end frame length configuration parameter because of
unsupported frame length
Config-Aborted (M)
Config-Aborted (Symmetry) – The group has rejected
the far-end symmetric mode configuration parameter
because of incompatible group symmetry
Config-Aborted
(Symmetry)
Config-Aborted (Other) – The group has rejected the
far-end configuration parameters for another reason
Config-Aborted (Other)
Insufficient Links – There is an insufficient number of
links to allow group activation
Insufficient Links
Blocked – Group operation has been blocked Blocked
Operational – The group has sufficient links (in both
directions) to operate and carry ATM layer cells
Operational
Config-Aborted (Version) – The group has rejected the
far-end IMA version configuration parameter, because
of unsupported IMA version
Config-Aborted (Version)
Ne/Fe Tx Clk Mode Transmission clocking mode used by the near-end and
far-end IMA group
CTC
ITC
Tx/Rx IMA ID IMA group ID 0–255
Tx/Rx Frame Length
(Cells)
Frame length, in the transmit and receive direction,
used by the IMA group
32, 64, 128, 256
Tx/Rx Timing Ref Link The link index of the transmission or the receiving
timing-reference link used by the near-end or far-end
for IMA data-cell clock recovery to or from the ATM
layer
A value of 0 indicates that the link has not been
defined
0–16
Tx/Rx Available Cell
Rate (Cells/sec)
The current cell rate in cells per second that is
provided by the group in the transmission or the
receiving direction in relation to all transmission or
receiving active links
Tx/Rx Configured Links The number of defined transmit or receive group links 0–16
Tx/Rx Active Links Number of currently active transmit or receive links 0–16
Failure Status Types of failure status:
No failure – The IMA group is operational No Failure
Start-up Near-End – The near-end is in startup Start-up Near-End
Start-up-Far-End – The far-end is in startup Start-up Far-End
Invalid M value near-end – The near-end does not
support the far-end Frame Length value
Invalid M Value Near-End
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-72 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Invalid M value far-end – The far-end does not
support the near-end Frame Length value
Invalid M Value Far-End
Symmetric Near-End – The near-end does not support
the far-end group symmetry
Symmetric Near-End
Asymmetric Far-End – The far-end does not support
the near-end group symmetry
Asymmetric Far-End
Insufficient links Near-End – Less than the minimum
number of defined Tx or Rx links are active for group
operation in the near-end
Insufficient Links Near-
End
Blocked NE and Blocked FE – The near-end or the far-
end is blocked
Blocked NE and Blocked
FE
Insufficient Links Far-End – Less than the minimum
number of defined Tx or Rx links are active for group
operation in the far-end
Insufficient Links Far-End
Blocked Near-End – Group near-end operation has
been blocked
Blocked Links Near-End
Blocked links Far-End – Group far-end operation has
been blocked
Blocked Links Far-End
Other –Other failure status messages, depending on
the specific system implementation (for example,
group timing mode mismatch)
Other
Invalid IMA version Near-End – Far-end unsupported
IMA version
Invalid IMA Version
Near-End
Invalid IMA version Far-End – Far-end unsupported IMA
version
Invalid IMA Version
Far-End
Last Change Time of the last status change detected in the IMA
group
Format:YYYY-MM-DD,
hh:mm:ss
Running Time (sec) Time (in seconds) that the IMA group has been in the
operational test
0–4*10^9
Least Delay Link Link index of the defined link with the smallest delay.
0 indicates that the link has not been defined or that
the link with the smallest delay has not yet been
determined.
0–16
Max Observed
Differential Delay
(msec)
Most recently observed maximum difference between
the smallest and longest propagation delay
0–4*10^9
Viewing IMA Link Status
When the E1/T1 port is working in IMA mode (as opposed to UNI mode), you can view the IMA link status.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-73
To view the IMA link status:
1. Double-click the E1/T1 Port in the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
The E1/T1 Port dialog box appears.
2. In the E1/T1 Port dialog box, click <IMA LINK>.
A light blue frame appears around the IMA LINK layer's label.
Figure 3-54. E1/T1 Port-Level Window – IMA LINK Layer Selected
3. From the Configuration menu of the E1/T1 Port menu bar, select Link Status.
The Link Status dialog box appears and displays the current IMA link details.
Figure 3-55. Link Status Dialog Box
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-74 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Table 3-34. E1/T1 IMA Link Info
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Port Type of port E1 1-4/8/16
T1 1-4/8/16
J1 1-4/8/16
Mode IMA mode of operation IMA Link
IMA Group If the IMA link does not belong to a
group, NMS displays an error message:
"IMA Link is not associated with an IMA Group. Data is irrelevant."
1-4
Not in Group
Tx State Current state of outgoing data link Usable
Unusable
Not in Group
Rx State Current state of incoming data link Usable
Unusable
Not in Group
Rx Failure Status Indication regarding any failure of the
incoming data link
LIF Failure
No Failure
Tx Link ID ID of the outgoing data link (Read Only)
Rx Link ID ID of the incoming data link (Read Only)
Configuring ATM Cross-Connections (XCs)
ATM cross-connects deliver the ATM-based traffic over VC or VP connections. Each ATM XC is configured individually on the ATM XC menu.
To access the ATM Cross Connection Table dialog box:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
The light blue frame surrounds the device image and the main menu becomes available.
2. From the main menu, select Configuration >ATM.
3. Select XC and then ATM from the submenu.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-75
Figure 3-56. ATM Cross Connection Table Dialog Box
Table 3-35. ATM Cross Connection Table Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Current Number of
Entries
Current number of defined XCs 0–128
Maximum Number of
Entries
Maximum number of XCs that can be
defined
128
XC ID
Unique string that identifies the XC
Up to 9 alphanumeric
characters, case-
sensitive
Default: blank
EP-1 Port The endpoint’s (1) port type and mode
E1/T1 1-4
IMA Group 1-4
ATM-155 1, 2
EP-1 VPI The endpoint’s (1) VPI.
The VP/VC XC configuration should
comply with the following rules:
• Two VP XCs with the same VPI cannot
be configured on the same port.
• Two VC XCs with the same VPI/VCI
cannot be configured on the same
port.
• VPI/VCI cannot be changed on-the-fly
(dynamically).
0–255
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-76 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
EP-1 VCI The endpoint’s (1) VCI for VC XC.
The field is disabled when
XC Type = “VP”.
The VC XC configuration should comply
with the same rules defined above for
the EP-1 VPI.
32–65535
EP-2 Port Port type and mode of endpoint 2 E1/T1 1–4
IMA Group 1–4
ATM-155 1, 2
EP-2 VPI VPI of endpoint 2 0–255
EP-2 VCI VCI of endpoint 2 32–65535
Type The XC type VP, VC
The following buttons are available in the ATM Cross Connection Table dialog box:
• Add – Allows you to add a new XC.
• Parameters – Opens the ATM Cross Connection Parameters dialog box, as explained in Viewing the ATM Cross Connection Parameters.
• Remove – Allows you to remove the selected XC. The button is disabled when no XC is selected.
• Next – Retrieves the next XC entries from the Agent and displays them on the table. The button is disabled when the last entry appears.
• Search – Opens a search dialog box that allows you to search for a specific XC.
• Close – Closes the ATM Cross Connection dialog box.
• Refresh – Retrieves the most current XC information and updates the displayed parameters.
Viewing the ATM Cross Connection Parameters
The details of each XC can be displayed in the ATM Cross Connection Parameters dialog box.
To display the ATM XC parameters:
• In the ATM Cross Connection Table dialog box (see Figure 3-56), select the row of the XC the details of which you want to display, and click <Parameters>.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-77
Figure 3-57. ATM Cross Connection Dialog Box
Table 3-36. ATM Cross Connection Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
XC ID
The XC ID is a unique string, used to
make XC identification easier.
Up to 9 alphanumeric
characters, case-
sensitive
Default: Blank
Port (EP1, EP2) The channel’s port type and mode.
Applies for both for EP1 and EP2.
E1/T1 1–4
IMA Group 1–4
ATM-155 1, 2
VPI (EP1, EP2)
The channel’s VPI.
Applies for both EP1 and EP2.
0–255
VCI (EP1, EP2) The channel’s VCI for VC XC.
Applies for both EP1 and EP2.
32–65535
Traffic Descriptor
(EP1, EP2)
The XC’s traffic descriptor.
Applies for both EP1 and EP2.
1–99999
Default: 1
OAM Descriptor
(EP1, EP2)
The channel’s OAM descriptor.
Applies for both EP1 and EP2.
1–256 (max XC*2)
Default: 1
Adding ATM Cross Connections
You can add up to 128 XCs for ACE-3100, ACE-3200, via the Add ATM Cross Connection dialog box.
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-78 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
To add an ATM cross connection:
1. In the ATM Cross Connection Table dialog box (see Figure 3-56), click <Add>.
Figure 3-58. Add ATM Cross Connection Dialog Box
2. Configure the parameters in the editable fields (see Table 3-37) and click <Apply>.
The system validates the new XC (see XC Validation). Once validated, the XC is added to the ATM Cross Connection Table.
Table 3-37. Add ATM XC Table
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW)
XC Type The type of XC. VP, VC
Default: VC
XC ID
The XC ID is a unique string, used to make
XC identification easier.
If you choose not to edit any value, a
number is automatically allocated by the
system.
Up to 9 alphanumeric
characters, case-
sensitive
Default: Blank
Port (EP1, EP2) The channel’s port type and mode.
Applies for both EP1 and EP2.
E1/T1 1–4
IMA Group 1–4
ATM-155 1, 2
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-79
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW)
VPI (EP1, EP2)
The channel’s VPI
VP/VC XC configuration should comply with
the following rules:
• Two VP XC with the same VPI cannot be
configured on the same port.
• Two VC XC with the same VPI/VCI
cannot be configured on the same
port.
• VPI/VCI cannot be changed on-the-fly.
Applies for both EP1 and EP2.
0–255
VCI (EP1, EP2) The channel’s VCI for VC XC.
Field is disabled when the selected
XC Type = “VP”.
VC XC configuration should comply with
the same rules defined above for the VPI.
Applies for both EP1 and EP2.
32–65535
Traffic Descriptor
(EP1, EP2)
The XC’s traffic descriptor.
Clicking the […] button opens the Traffic Descriptor Table Dialog Box, enabling
traffic descriptor index selection.
The traffic descriptor should comply with
the following rules:
• It must be created in advance
• Its PCR cannot be higher than the
output rate.
1–99999
Default: 1
OAM Descriptor
(EP1, EP2)
The channel’s OAM descriptor.
Clicking the […] button opens the OAM Descriptor Table Dialog Box, enabling OAM
Descriptor index selection.
The OAM descriptor must be created in
advance.
1–256 (max XC * 2)
Default: 1
• E1/T1 port working in IMA mode cannot be selected as an XC endpoint.
• With Loopback Operation set to On, the maximum number of VPI/VCIs is 128.
XC Validation
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 performs the following XC validations:
• Checks whether the table is full. If so, the Apply button is disabled and no XC can be added.
• Checks whether the ranges of the VPI, VCI, traffic descriptor, and OAM descriptor (for both EP1 and EP2) are within the acceptable range. If a
Note
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-80 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
parameter is found to be out of range, an appropriate error message appears.
• Checks whether the XC ID has a unique value. If not, an error message appears.
• Checks whether the Port value of both endpoints is different. If not, an error message appears.
• Checks whether there are VCLs with the same VPI. If so, an error message appears.
• Checks whether there are VCLs with the same VPI/VCI. If so, an error message appears.
• Checks whether traffic descriptors are defined for both endpoints. If not, an error message appears.
• Checks whether an OAM descriptor exists for both endpoints. If an OAM descriptor is missing, an error message appears.
Removing ATM Cross Connections
To remove an ATM cross connection:
1. In the ATM Cross Connection Table dialog box (see Figure 3-56), select the cross connection you want to remove.
2. Click <Remove>.
The cross connection is removed.
Configuring CES Cross Connections (XCs)
To access the CES Cross Connection Table dialog box:
• From the Configuration menu, select ATM > XC > CES.
Figure 3-59. CES Cross Connection Table Dialog Box
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-81
Table 3-38. CES Cross Connection Table Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Current Number of
Entries
The current number of CES cross
connections defined
Maximum Number of
Entries
The maximum number of CES cross
connections that can be defined
XC ID
Unique string that identifies the XC Up to 9 alphanumeric
characters, case-
sensitive
Default: blank
ATM Port The endpoint’s (1) port type and mode E1/T1 1–4
IMA Group 1–4
ATM-155 1, 2
ATM VPI The endpoint’s (1) VPI.
The VP/VC XC configuration should
comply with the following rules:
• Two VP XCs with the same VPI cannot
be configured on the same port.
• Two VC XCs with the same VPI/VCI
cannot be configured on the same
port.
• VPI/VCI cannot be changed on-the-fly
(dynamically).
0–255
ATM VCI The endpoint’s (1) VCI for VC XC.
The field is disabled when
XC Type = “VP”.
The VC XC configuration should comply
with the same rules defined above for
the EP-1 VPI.
32–65535
Default: 32
CES Port Port type and mode of endpoint 2 E1/T1 1–4
IMA Group 1–4
ATM-155 1, 2
Time Slots The CES bundle time slots 1–32 for E1
1–24 for T1
The following buttons are available in the CES Cross Connections Table dialog box:
• Add – Allows you to add a new XC.
• Parameters – Opens the CES Cross Connection Parameters dialog box.
• Remove – Allows you to remove the selected XC. The button is disabled when no XC is selected.
• Next – Retrieves the next XC entries from the Agent and displays them on the table. The button is disabled when the last entry appears.
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-82 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
• Search – Opens a Search dialog box that allows you to search for a specific XC.
• Close – Closes the dialog box.
• Refresh – Retrieves the most current XC information and updates the displayed details.
Viewing the CES Cross Connection Parameters
The details of each XC can be displayed in the CES Cross Connection Parameters dialog box.
To display the CES XC parameters:
• In the CES Cross Connection Table dialog box (see Figure 3-59), select the row of the XC the details of which you want to display, and click <Parameters>.
Figure 3-60. CES Cross Connection Parameters Dialog Box
Table 3-39. CES Cross Connection Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
XC ID
The XC ID is a unique string, used to
make the XC identification easier
Up to 9 alphanumeric
characters, case-
sensitive
Default: Blank
ATM End-Point
Parameters
Port The ATM port type and number IMA Group 1–4
ATM-155 1, 2
VPI
The channel’s VPI 0–255 for UNI
0–4095 for NNI
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-83
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
VCI The channel’s VCI for VP XC
Field is disabled when the selected
XC Type = “VP”
32–65535
Default: 32
Traffic Descriptor The traffic descriptor of the CES XC 0 – 99999
OAM Descriptor The channel’s OAM descriptor 1–256
Default: 2
CES End-Point
Parameters
Port The CES port type and number E1 1–4
T1 1–4
J1 1–4
Time Slots The CES bundle’s time slots Unstructured, or a list
of time slot groups
separated by commas.
CDVT Buffer
(msec)
CDVT buffer delay in milliseconds
towards the transmit direction (ATM to
TDM direction)
1–32
Default: 3
Conditioning Data
Pattern (hex)
The conditioning data pattern of the
CES bundle. This is the byte code that
is transmitted over CES allocated time
slots upon underflow\overflow or far-
end LOS, LOF and AIS.
Disabled when the Line Type of the
selected CES port is Unframed.
0x00 – 0xFF
Adding CES Cross Connections
You can add up to 128 XCs for ACE-3100, ACE-3200, via the Add CES Cross Connection dialog box.
To add a CES cross connection:
1. In the CES Cross Connection Table dialog box (see Figure 3-59), click <Add>.
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-84 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-61. Add CES Cross Connection Dialog Box
2. Configure the parameters in the editable fields (see Table 3-40) and click <Apply>.
The system validates the new XC (see XC Validation). Once validated, the XC is added to the CES Cross Connection Table.
Table 3-40: Add CES XC Table
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW/RO)
XC ID
The XC ID is a unique string, used to make
XC identification easier.
If you choose not to edit any value, a
number is automatically allocated by the
system.
Up to 9 alphanumeric
characters, case-
sensitive
Default: Blank
ATM End-Point
Port The ATM port type and number. IMA Group 1–4
ATM-155 1, 2
VPI
The channel’s VPI
VP/VC XC configuration should comply with
the following rules:
• Two VP XC with the same VPI cannot be
configured on the same port.
• Two VC XC with the same VPI/VCI
cannot be configured on the same
port.
• VPI/VCI cannot be changed on-the-fly.
Applies for both EP1 and EP2.
0–255 for UNI
0–4095 for NNI
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-85
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW/RO)
VCI The channel’s VCI for VP XC.
Field is disabled when the selected
XC Type = “VP”.
VC XC configuration should comply with
the same rules defined above for the VPI.
Applies for both EP1 and EP2.
32–65535
Default: 32
OAM Descriptor The channel’s OAM descriptor.
Clicking the […] button opens the OAM Descriptor Table Dialog Box, enabling OD
index selection.
The OAM Descriptor must be created in
advance (applies for both EP1 and EP2).
1–256
Default: 2
CES End-Point May be multibundle (for structured time
slots only).
Port The CES port type and number E1 1–4
T1 1–4
Time Slots The CES bundle’s time slots. Click <…> to
modify.
Unstructured, or a list
of timeslot groups
separated by commas.
CDVT Buffer
(msec)
CDVT buffer delay in milliseconds towards
the transmit direction (ATM to TDM
direction).
1–32
Default: 3
Conditioning Data
Pattern (hex)
The conditioning data pattern of the CES
bundle. This is the byte code that is
transmitted over CES allocated time slots
upon underflow\overflow or far-end LOS,
LOF and AIS.
Disabled when the Line Type of the
selected CES port is Unframed.
0x00 – 0xFF
Selecting Timeslots
For each CES cross connection, you can specify timeslots.
To select a timeslot for a CES cross connection:
1. In the CES Cross Connection Table dialog box (see Figure 3-59), click <Add>.
The Add CES Cross Connection dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 3-61.
2. In the Add CES Cross Connection dialog box, click <TSs Selection>.
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-86 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-62. Time Slots Selection Dialog Box
3. Configure the parameters in the editable fields (see Table 3-41) and click <OK>.
The system validates the new XC (see XC Validation). Once validated, the XC is added to the CES Cross Connection Table.
Table 3-41: Add CES Cross Connection Table Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO/RW)
CES Endpoint Port The end point of the CES port User selection (READ
ONLY)
Time Slots A row of cells indicating the time slots
and their status.
E1: 1–31
T1: 1–24
Gray – Available
Blue – Unavailable e.g.,
occupied by another
connection
Yellow – Available but
currently occupied by this
connection.
Read/Write
• <OK> is disabled when no yellow cells exist.
• <Select All> makes all available cells yellow, i.e., occupied by this connection.
• <Clear All> makes all cells occupied by this connection available i.e., gray.
XC Validation
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 performs the following XC validations:
• Checks whether the table is full. If so, the Apply button is disabled and no XC can be added.
Note
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-87
• Checks whether the ranges of the VPI, VCI, traffic descriptor, and OAM descriptor (for both EP1 and EP2) are within the acceptable range. If a parameter is found to be out of range, an appropriate error message appears.
• Checks whether the XC ID has a unique value. If not, an error message appears.
• Checks whether the Port value of both endpoints is different. If not, an error message appears.
• Checks whether there are VCLs with the same VPI. If so, an error message appears.
• Checks whether there are VCLs with the same VPI/VCI. If so, an error message appears.
• Checks whether traffic descriptors are defined for both endpoints. If not, an error message appears.
• Checks whether an OAM Descriptor exists for both endpoints. If an OD is missing, an error message appears.
Removing CES Cross Connections
To remove an CES cross connection:
1. In the CES Cross Connection Table dialog box (see Figure 3-59), select the cross connection you want to remove.
2. Click <Remove>.
The cross connection is removed.
Configuring Bridge Parameters
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 supports LAN-to-LAN bridging to allow backhauling of Ethernet traffic originating from the cellular site/Node B. The Ethernet ports can be used as bridge ports. The functionality includes support for VLAN-aware bridges in IVL mode.
To set the bridge parameters:
1. From the Configurations menu, select Bridge > Parameters.
The Bridge Parameters dialog box is displayed.
Figure 3-63. Bridge Parameters
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-88 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Table 3-42. Bridge Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO/RW)
VLAN Mode Aware
Aging Time (sec) The period in seconds for entries to age in
the MAC table. If no frame is received from
a specific MAC address, the address is
deleted from the MAC table once the
defined period expires.
300–1000
Default: 300
2. Set the Aging Time, Bridging Mode and Type.
3. Select Enable PPP if required.
4. Click <Set>.
Adding a Bridge Port
The behavior and attributes of bridge ports is defined via the Bridge Ports menu.
To add a bridge port:
1. From the Configurations menu, select Bridge > Bridge Ports...
The Bridge Ports table is displayed.
Figure 3-64. Bridge Ports
2. Click <Add>.
The Add Bridge Port dialog box appears.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-89
Figure 3-65. Add Bridge Port
Table 3-43. Bridge Port Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO/RW)
Number Number of the bridge port which details
are currently displayed
1–73
Default: 1
Port The bridge port parameter
Administrative
Status
The port activation state Up
Down
Ingress Filtering When enabled, ACE-3100, ACE-3200
discards incoming frames which VID is not
included in the port's member set.
When disabled, the port accepts all
incoming frames.
Enable
Disable
Default: Disable
Accept Frame Type When set to 'All', both tagged and
untagged received frames are accepted
and assigned to the port's VID.
When set to 'Tagged only', untagged
received frames are discarded.
Relevant only in VLAN-aware mode and for
Ethernet port type.
All
Tagged only
Default: All
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-90 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO/RW)
Port VID A VLAN ID that is either assigned to
untagged frames received on a
VLAN-aware bridge, or used for stacking
on tagged frames.
Relevant only in VLAN-aware mode and for
Ethernet port type.
1–4094
Default: 1
Default Priority Tag The priority that the frame receives by
default when:
• An untagged frame is received
• Stacking is performed
• Relevant only in VLAN-aware mode and for Ethernet port type.
0–7
Default: 0
Maximal Number of
MAC Address
Maximum number of MAC addresses that
are kept for the bridge port in the MAC
table
0–512
Default: 512
Egress Tag
Handling
Indicates whether the higher layer
(external) VLAN tag should be stripped
(removed) or not before the frame exits
the bridge port. The tag is removed if
'Stripping' is selected.
Relevant only in VLAN-aware mode and for
Ethernet port type.
Stripping
None
Default: None
Ingress Tag
Handling
Indicates whether VLAN stacking should be
performed when a frame enters the bridge
port. An extra VLAN tag is added to the
frame if 'Stacking' is selected.
Relevant only in VLAN-aware mode and for
Ethernet port type.
Stacking
None
Default: None
Copy Original
Priority
3. Enter the bridge port details and click <Set>.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-91
Configuring Router Parameters
The router functionality allows ACE-3100, ACE-3200 to establish an IP link with the management station(s), and also allows management traffic to be carried transparently through the unit towards specified targets, over pseudowire connections or other channels.
To set the router parameters:
• From the Configurations menu, select Router > Parameters.
The Router Parameters dialog box is displayed.
Figure 3-66. Router Parameters
Table 3-44. Router Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO/RW)
System Address Field is read only when value is the same
as LDP ID value (see LDP Parameters)
Default Gateway: The default gateway input is enabled only
when the Router Interface is Ethernet.
Router Interface Select from predefined router interfaces
(see Defining Router Interfaces)
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-92 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO/RW)
IP Address The unique IP address that represents this
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 unit (does not
represent an IP subnet).
Note:
• This IP address cannot be included in the subnet of one of the interfaces.
• Cannot be changed when the LDP ID has the same address.
0.0.0.0 –
255.255.255.255 (any
legal IP address)
RP Aging Time The period in seconds that must pass
before ARP entries are discarded
300–100000
Default: 1200
Defining Router Interfaces
To define a router interface:
• From the Configurations menu, select Router > Interface
The Router Interface dialog box is displayed, Figure 3-67
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-93
Figure 3-67. Router Interface Table
To add a router interface
• Click <Add> button in the Router Interface Table.
The Add Router Interface dialog box appears Figure 3-68.
To remove a router interface
1. Select the router interface to be removed from the Router Interface Table.
2. Click <Remove> button in the Router Interface Table.
Removal of a router interface may lead to disconnection of an agent.
Note
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-94 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-68. Add Router Interface
Table 3-45. Router Interface Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
Number Unique ID number of the router interface
which details are displayed.
1–32
Name An optional name that describes this
interface (does not have to be a unique
name)
Up to 32 alphanumeric
characters;
case-sensitive
Bound To Type Port or group Port
VCL Interface
PW
PPPoE
GRE
Bound To Port Port number
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-95
Parameter Description Possible Values
VPI VPI of the PVC connected to the host interface
0–255 UNI
0–4095 NNI
VPI of the PVC connected to the host
interface.
Not available if Ethernet port type was
selected.
Note: A router interface with the same VPI as
an existing VP XC on the same port cannot be
configured.
VCI VCI of the PVC connected to the router
interface. Not available for Ethernet and PW
interface type.
32–65535
Default: 32
PW PW port number
PPPoE ID The PPPoE ID must be of a configured PPPoE
logical entity of 1.
1–4
IP address IP address of the router interface.
Note:
• For PPPoE interface type (see below), 0.0.0.0 must be used to indicate that the IP is allocated dynamically by the PPP session.
• The IP address cannot be included in the subnet of one of the configured interfaces.
0.0.0.0 –
255.255.255.255 (any
legal IP address)
Default: 0.0.0.0
IP mask Subnet mask of the router interface.
Note: The IP mask address should always be a sequence of all ones. It cannot include gaps or zeros in between.
0.0.0.0 –
255.255.255.255 (any
legal IP mask)
Out Traffic
Descriptor
Traffic descriptor of the PVC connected to the
router interface. Not available for Ethernet,
Ethernet group PPPoE, or PW interface type.
Note:
• A traffic descriptor (TD) must be configured before it can appear on the menu.
• The descriptor's rate cannot be higher than the port's output rate.
• A TD with the CBR-CES service category cannot be used.
1–99999
Default: 1
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-96 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
OAM Descriptor
OAM descriptor of the PVC connected to the
host interface. Not available for Ethernet,
Ethernet group PPPoE, or PW interface type.
Note: An OAM descriptor (OD) must be configured before it can appear on the menu and it must be defined as end-to-end or segment.
1–256
Default: 2
LLC/SNAP
Encapsulation
Encapsulation PDU Bridged PDU
Routed PDU
VLAN tagging Indicates whether a VLAN tag is to be
inserted into the TX (receive) frames.
Available only for Ethernet interface type.
Enable
Disable
Default: Disable
VLAN ID Identifies the VLAN that is carried on the
VLAN tag. Available only if VLAN tagging is
enabled (see above).
0–4094
Default: 0
VLAN priority Indicates the priority bit value of the VLAN
that is carried on the VLAN tag. Available only
if VLAN tagging is enabled (see above).
0–7
Default: 0
Tunnel Source IP
Address
The source IP address of the IP header on
which the GRE is running
Valid IP address
Default: 0.0.0.0
Tunnel
Destination IP
Address
The destination IP address of the layer on
which the GRE is running
Valid IP address
Default: 0.0.0.0
Management
Access
Enables or disables management access
(SNMP, Telnet, SSH, Web, SSL) via this router
interface
Enable
Disable
Default: Enable
• All router interface parameters cannot be changed dynamically (on-the-fly).
• The number of router interfaces is limited to 2.
• The maximum number of PW type router interfaces is 2.
Setting the Static Route Parameters
For remote manager IPs and peers that are located in a subnet different than that of the router interface, you need to assign static route parameters.
To access the static route parameters:
1. Navigate Configuration > Router > Routing
The Routing Table is displayed Figure 3-69. The first line displays the default gateway.
2. Click <Add Static> to add a Static route.
Note
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-97
Figure 3-69. Routing Table
Table 3-46. Static Route Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
IP address IP address of the static route subnet or
station.
It is possible to enter a multicast address
to support multicast clock distribution.
0.0.0.0 –
255.255.255.255
(any legal IP address)
IP mask IP mask of the static route subnet. 0.0.0.0 –
255.255.255.255
(any legal IP mask)
Next hop IP address of the next hop. Must belong to
the router interface's subnet.
Note:
• Multicast, broadcast or all ones address is not allowed.
0.0.0.0 –
255.255.255.255
Default: 0.0.0.0
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-98 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
• All zeros cannot be assigned to an address part that is not the router interface's subnet.
• If 0.0.0.0 is used, it indicates that the routing is based on the next hop interface number. This kind of setting is useful when the router interface is of an ATM VC type, PW or PPPoE type.
Next hop
interface
number
ID number of the router interface towards
which the destination subnet should be
router.
Available only if the next hop is 0.0.0.0.
A number of a
previously configured
router interface.
• The number of static routes is limited to 81.
• A static route cannot be deleted when it is used as a route of an existing peer.
To remove a static entry
1. Select the static entry to be removed.
2. Click <Remove Static> in the Routing Table.
The entry is removed.
To set the default gateway:
1. From the Configuration menu, select Router > Parameters …
The Router Parameters dialog appears.
Figure 3-70. Router Parameters
Note
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-99
Table 3-47. Add Router Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO/RW)
System Address Field is read only when value is the same
as LDP ID value (see LDP Parameters)
Default Gateway: The default gateway input is enabled only
when the Router Interface is Ethernet.
Router Interface Select from predefined router interfaces
(see Defining Router Interfaces)
IP Address The unique IP address that represents this
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 unit (does not
represent an IP subnet).
Note:
• This IP address cannot be included in the subnet of one of the interfaces.
• Cannot be changed when the LDP ID has the same address.
0.0.0.0 –
255.255.255.255 (any
legal IP address)
ARP Aging Time
(sec)
The period in seconds that must pass
before ARP entries are discarded
300–100000
Default: 1200
2. Click the Router Interface ellipsis button.
The Router Interfaces Table appears.
3. Select the router to be used as default.
4. Click <Select>.
5. Click <Set> to save the settings.
Configuring MPLS Parameters
To allow ACE-3100, ACE-3200 to deliver traffic over MPLS networks, the MPLS parameters should be defined.
To access the MPLS configuration parameters:
• From the Configuration menu, select MPLS.
The MPLS menu is displayed Figure 3-71.
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-100 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-71. MPLS Menu
Setting the Label Range
You can configure the range of local labels available for use on packet interfaces. The label range that you set is used by all MPLS applications that allocate local labels for dynamic label switching, MPLS traffic engineering, MPLS VPNs, and so on.
If you set a new label range that does not overlap the range currently in use, the new range will not take effect until the router is reloaded again
To set the label range:
• Navigate to Configuration > MPLS > Label Range
The MPLS Label Range dialog box opens
Figure 3-72. MPLS Label Range
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-101
Table 3-48. MPLS Label Range
Parameter Description Possible Values
Dynamic label
range
Range of the MPLS dynamic label. Relevant
only for the incoming direction and has no
effect on the outgoing direction.
Note:
• Cannot be changed when the LDP signaling protocol is enabled.
• The range setting is rejected if there are static PW connections or tunnels configured with labels that are included in the dynamic range.
• The range is relevant to both tunnel and PW labels.
• ACE-3100, ACE-3200 supports a single dynamic label range of up to 4094 labels. In such a case, the range is 16–65534.
• The static range is automatically determined according to the dynamic range selection, yet it cannot be included in the 16–65534 range which is allocated only for dynamic labels.
• When LDP is not in use, the range can be set to 0–0.
10000–14095
16–65534 for
dynamic labels only
0–0 when the
dynamic range is not
set
Default:
10000–14095
Figure 3-73. LDP Labels Table
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-102 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-74. LDP Hello Table
Table 3-49. MPLS Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
Dynamic label
range
Range of the MPLS dynamic label. Relevant
only for the incoming direction and has no
effect on the outgoing direction.
Note:
• Cannot be changed when the LDP signaling protocol is enabled.
• The range setting is rejected if there are static PW connections or tunnels configured with labels that are included in the dynamic range.
• The range is relevant to both tunnel and PW labels.
• ACE-3100, ACE-3200 supports a single dynamic label range of up to 4094 labels. In such a case, the range is 16–65534.
• The static range is automatically determined according to the dynamic range selection, yet it cannot be included in the 16–65534 range which is allocated only for dynamic labels.
• When LDP is not in use, the range can be set to 0–0.
10000–14095
16–65534 for
dynamic labels only
0–0 when the
dynamic range is not
set
Default:
10000–14095
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-103
Signaling
protocol
Access the LDP options See Configuring the LDP Signaling Protocol
Tunnel LSP Access the Tunnel LSP options See Configuring the Tunnel LSP Parameters
Configuring the LDP Signaling Protocol
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 uses the MPLS label distribution protocol (LDP) to automatically assign and distribute pseudowires and tunnel labels between MPLS peers.
To access the LDP parameters:
• From the MPLS menu (see Figure 3-71), select LDP.
The LDP Parameters dialog box opens.
Figure 3-75. LDP Parameters dialog box
Table 3-50. LDP Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
LDP ID The LDP identifier to be used in all LDP
sessions established with the unit.
Note:
• The IP must be identical to one of the interface IP address or system address
• Cannot be changed when LDP is enabled.
• If the LDP ID is not yet configured and a system address is defined, the system address is automatically displayed by default, and you only need to save this setting (press S).
0.0.0.0 –
255.255.255.255
Default: 0.0.0.0
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-104 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
Mode Indicates whether all LDP operations
performed by the unit are enabled or
disabled.
'Enable' can be selected only if an LDP ID
is defined.
Enable
Disable
Default: Enable
Hello timer
(sec)
The required interval in seconds between
two consecutive Hello messages. LDP hello
messages enable LDP nodes to discover one
another and to detect the failure of a
neighbor or of the link to the neighbor.
Hello messages are sent periodically on all
interfaces where LDP is enabled.
The Hello timer cannot be modified when
LDP interfaces or targeted peers are
defined.
1–65534
Default: 45
Keep alive timer
(sec)
For cases of inactivity, define the time in
seconds after which a Keep Alive message is
sent.
Cannot be modified when LDP interfaces or
targeted peers are defined.
1–65534
Default: 40
Interface Access the LDP interface configuration See Configuring the LDP Interface Parameters below
Targeted peers Access the targeted peers configuration See Setting the LDP Targeted Peers
Configuring the LDP Interface Parameters
The LDP interface can be referenced to one of the existing router interfaces.
To access the LDP interface parameters:
1. From the LDP menu, select Interface.
The Interface Table is displayed.
2. Click <Change> to open the LDP Interface dialog box.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-105
Figure 3-76. LDP Interface Table
Figure 3-77. Change LDP Interface
Table 3-51. LDP Interface Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
Router interface ID number of a previously defined router
interface on which the LDP basic Hello should
be activated. You can enter a different number
to display another interface's details.
1–32
IP address Displays (read-only) the IP address of the router
interface selected above.
0.0.0.0 –
255.255.255.255
(must match the IP of
the router interface)
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-106 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
LDP mode When enabled, LDP is activated on the
selected router interface. Can be enabled
only for Ethernet interfaces.
Cannot be changed when the general LDP mode
is enabled.
Enable
Disable
Default: Disable
Basic Hello mode Select whether basic Hello should be activated
on the router interface. Visible only when LDP
mode is enabled (see above).
Note:
• Should be enabled for every router interface on which LDP basic discovery is enabled.
• There can be only one router interface supporting basic Hello over a single physical port.
• Cannot be changed when the general LDP mode is enabled.
Enable
Disable
Default: Disable
Setting the LDP Targeted Peers
You can define targeted remote peers with which ACE-3100, ACE-3200 should attempt establishing LDP sessions.
To set the targeted peers:
• From the LDP menu, select Targeted Peers.
The Targeted Peers menu is displayed.
Figure 3-78. LDP, Targeted Peers
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-107
Table 3-52. Targeted Peers Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
Peer number ID number of an existing (previously
defined) remote targeted peer. You can
enter a different number to display
another peer's details.
1–32
IP address Displays (read-only) the IP address of the
remote targeted peer selected above
0.0.0.0 –
255.255.255.255
(must match the IP of
the remote peer)
Targeted mode Enable or disable the targeted peers
functionality. When enabled, ACE-3100,
ACE-3200 attempts to create a targeted
LDP session with the peer.
Enable
Disable
Default: Disable
Configuring the Tunnel LSP Parameters
LSP tunnels are configured separately in the ingress and egress directions.
To configure the ingress tunnel:
1. From the MPLS menu, select Tunnel LSP > Ingress.
The Ingress Tunnel LSP Table is displayed.
Figure 3-79. Ingress LSP Tunnel Table
2. Click <Add> to add a new LSP Tunnel.
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-108 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-80. Add Ingress LSP Tunnel
Table 3-53. Ingress Tunnel Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
Index ID number of the ingress tunnel 1–32
Name Name of the ingress tunnel Up to 32 characters
Default: Tunnel-in
Provisioning
mode
Indicates whether the tunnel assignment
method is manual or LDP assigned.
The provisioning mode cannot be changed
dynamically (on-the-fly).
Manual
LDP
Default: Manual
Label ID of the label. Visible only if the
provisioning mode is set to Manual.
A value within the
static label range
(16–65534; see
Setting the Label Range
• When the provisioning mode is set to LDP, a label-blinding message with the LDP address is published towards all LDP sessions created locally.
• The label binding message is not published over an LDP session created with targeted peers, meaning that tunnel labels are never created with targeted peers.
• Only one ingress tunnel created by LDP (not manual) is possible.
To configure the egress tunnel:
• From the MPLS menu, select Tunnel LSP > Egress.
The Egress Tunnel LSP Table is displayed.
Note
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-109
Table 3-54. Egress Tunnel Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
Index ID number of the egress tunnel 1–32
Name Name of the egress tunnel Up to 32 characters
Default: Tunnel-out
Provisioning
mode
Indicates whether the tunnel assignment
method is manual or LDP-assigned.
The provisioning mode cannot be changed
dynamically (on-the-fly).
Manual
LDP
Default: Manual
Peer number ID number of the remote peer for which
this egress tunnel is created. Visible only if
the provisioning mode is LDP.
An existing peer
number
Label ID of the label. Visible only if the
provisioning mode is set to Manual.
A value within the
static label range
(16–65534; see
Setting the Label Range
EXP bits mode Indicates how the EXP bits of the tunnel
label are set. If copied from the PW
connection, the EXP bits are copied from
the PSN parameters of the specific PW.
If set as static, the EXP value is set manually
below.
The EXP bits mode cannot be changed
dynamically.
Copy from PW
Static
Default: Copy from PW
EXP bits The required value for the EXP bits. Visible
only if the EXP bits mode is set to Static.
0–7
Configuring Multiservice over PSN Parameters
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 are equipped with Ethernet interface for ATM/TDM over PSN traffic concentration. Ethernet tunneling parameters are configured via the Multiservice over PSN menu, which provides access to the following tasks:
• Configuring General Multiservice over PSN Parameters
• Defining PSN Peers
• Creating Pseudowire (PW) Connections
• Configuring the General PW Parameters.
To access the Multiservice over PSN options:
• From the Configuration menu, select Multiservice over PSN.
The Multiservice over PSN menu is displayed.
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-110 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Table 3-55. Multiservice over PSN Menu Options
Parameter Description Possible Values
General Access the general multiservice over PSN
parameters configuration
Refer to
Peer Access to the peer configuration Refer to
Pseudo wire
(PW)
Access the PW configuration Refer to
Configuring General Multiservice over PSN Parameters
The general parameters include packet misordering and reordering instructions for ATM over PSN traffic.
To access the ATM parameters:
• From the Multiservice over PSN menu, select General > ATM Parameters.
The ATM Parameters menu is displayed.
Figure 3-81. ATM Parameters
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-111
Table 3-56. ATM Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
Misorder window
size
In packet-switched traffic, some packets are not
received according to their predefined sequence
number. This condition is defined as misorder.
Accordingly, this parameter defines the time
window (seconds), in which ACE-3100, ACE-3200
tries to fix the packet sequence misorder errors.
Cannot be changed when PWs exist.
0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32
Default: 4
Reordering To allow proper de-capsulation of ATM traffic,
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 has a mechanism that fixes
misorders by re-ordering the received packets
correctly.
You can enable or disable the reordering
mechanism.
Cannot be changed when PWs exist.
Enable
Disable
Default: Disable
Defining PSN Peers
In a packet-switched network application, ACE-3100, ACE-3200 operates opposite remote peer devices that each must be defined individually on the Peer menu.
An Ethernet router interface and a default gateway must be configured prior to configuring PSN peers.
To access the Peer menu:
• From the Multiservice over PSN menu, select Peer.
The Peer table is displayed.
Figure 3-82. Peer Table
Note
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-112 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Table 3-57. Peer Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
Peer number A logical number representing a peer device 1–1024
Default: Next available
peer number
Peer name Name of the peer Up to 32 characters
Default: Peer-1
IP address IP address of the peer device.
Note:
• All routing definitions (IP and static routes) must be configured in advance before entering the IP address of the peer device.
• Peer IP address cannot be the same as the router IP address.
• The address part that is not the subnet cannot be all zeros or all ones.
• Broadcast, all ones and all zeros are not allowed
• Multicast is allowed between 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255
• Peer IP address cannot be changed dynamically (on-the-fly).
0.0.0.0 –
255.255.255.255
The remote peer device cannot be removed when there is a PW configured for this peer device.
Creating Pseudowire (PW) Connections
In a packet-switched network application, ACE-3100, ACE-3200 communicates with peer devices via pseudowire (PW) connections that are established over the PSN and are configured via the Pseudowire menu.
To access the pseudowire configuration menu:
• From the Multiservice over PSN menu, select PW.
The Pseudo Wire Table is displayed.
Note
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-113
Figure 3-83. Pseudo Wire Table
Table 3-58. Pseudowire (PW) Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
PW number A logical number representing a PW
connection
1–66
Default: Next available
PW number
PW name Name of the PW connection Up to 32 characters
Default: PW-
General
parameters
Access the general parameters of this PW
PSN parameters Access the PSN parameters of this PW
Service
parameters
Access the ATM/TDM service parameters of
this PW
• The Save command on this menu affects all the parameters that are set in the submenus.
• To remove (delete) a PW, press R.
Configuring the General PW Parameters
Each individual pseudo wire connection has general parameters that must be defined separately.
To access the general pseudo wire parameters:
1. From the PW table, select Change.
Note
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-114 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
The PW General Parameters dialog is displayed.
Figure 3-84. Pseudowire General Parameters
Table 3-59. Pseudowire General Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
PW number Displays the PW number as defined in the PW
menu (read-only)
See Table 3-58
PW name Displays the PW name as defined in the PW menu
(read-only)
See Table 3-58
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-115
Parameter Description Possible Values
PW type
Defines the PW type and the type of data it
carries.
For more information about the different
encapsulation types, refer to Appendix E.
ATM VP 1 to 1
ATM VC 1 to 1
ATM VP N to 1
ATM VC N to 1
AAL5-SDU
SAToP
Basic CES PSN
Default: ATM VC N to 1
PW subtype When the PW type is Basic CES PSN, the subtype
indicates whether the PW is used for clock
recovery, clock distribution or data.
Note: In order to configure IP multicast clock distribution, the relevant PW should be created using an IP multicast peer.
Clock recovery
Clock distribution
Data
PSN type The type of packet-switched network on which
this PW is established. "o" stands for over.
Note:
• UDPoIP is valid only for SAToP and Basic CES PSN pseudowire types.
• MPLSoIP cannot be selected when the PW subtype is clock recovery or clock distribution
• MPLSoGRE cannot be set with a peer that is routed through a PPPoE router interface.
MPLS
UDPoIP
MPLSoIP
MPLSoGRE
Default: MPLSoIP
Peer number Number of an existing PSN peer device (see
Defining PSN Peers) to which the current PW is
assigned. The PW terminates on this peer.
Note:
• When the provisioning mode is LDP PW ID (see below), the peer must be configured as a targeted peer.
• A peer with a multicast IP address can be set only for a clock distribution or a clock recovery PW.
• A peer that is routed through a PPPoE router interface cannot be set for MPLS over GRE.
• The peer number cannot be changed dynamicaly (on-the-fly).
1–32
Provisioning
mode
Determines whether the PW is established
manually or by LDP signaling
Manual
LDP PW ID
Default: Manual
PW ID A unique ID number that must be defined
identically on both the local and remote unit.
This ID is used to identify the PW connection
1–4294967295
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-116 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
when labels are exchanged with LDP.
Out PW label The PW label that is used in the outbound
direction. Relevant only if the provisioning mode
(see above) is set to Manual.
The out label's value range depends on the
selected PSN type.
1–4095 if the PSN type
is UDPoIP
16–1048575 for any
other PSN type
In PW label The PW label that is used in the inbound
direction. Not relevant for clock distribution.
If the PW is defined manually and the PSN type is
MPLS, MPLSoIP or MPLSoGRE, the PW value range
must be within the static label range.
1–4095 if the PSN type
is UDPoIP
Control word Determines whether a control word is used
on this PW.
The control word can be disabled only in the
following PW types (see above):
• ATM VP 1 to 1
• ATM VC 1 to 1
• ATM VP N to 1
• ATM VC N to 1.
For detailed information about the control word
structure, refer to Appendix E.
Enable
Disable
Default: Enable
Sequence
numbering
When disabled, the Sequence bit in the control
word equals zero (0). Relevant only if the control
word is enabled (see above).
Sequence numbering can be disabled only in the
following PW types:
• ATM VP 1 to 1
• ATM VC 1 to 1
• ATM VP N to 1
• ATM VC N to 1.
In addition, the AAL5-SDU PW type does not
support sequence numbering (set to Disable).
Enable
Disable
Default: Enable
TX queue The priority of the PW in the outbound direction
via the Ethernet port. Not relevant when the PW
subtype (see above) is clock recovery.
2 (highest priority)
3
4 (lowest priority)
Default:
4 for ATM VP 1 to 1,
ATM VC 1 to 1,
ATM VP N to 1,
ATM VC N to 1 and
AAL5-SDU
2 for SAToP and
Basic CES PSN
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-117
Parameter Description Possible Values
OAM mode Determines whether the OAM feature (using
VCCV-BFD messages) is enabled for this PW.
Not relevant if the PW type is SAToP, Basic
CES PSN or AAL5-SDU.
For more information about the VCCV-BFD
functionality, refer to Appendix F.
Disable
VCCV-BFD
Default: Disabled
Detection
multiplier
The negotiated transmit interval, multiplied by
this value, provides the detection time for the
transmitting system. Relevant only if the OAM
mode (see above) is set to VCCV-BFD.
2–60
Default: 2
Min TX interval
(μsec)
The minimum time interval in microseconds that
the system uses between transmitted BFD control
packets. Relevant only if the OAM mode
(see above) is set to VCCV-BFD.
1000000–4294967295
Default: 100000
Mix RX interval
(μsec)
The minimum time interval in microseconds that
the system uses between received BFD control
packets. Relevant only if the OAM mode
(see above) is set to VCCV-BFD.
1000000–4294967295
Default: 100000
The general PW parameters cannot be changed dynamically (on-the-fly).
2. Click <Next>.
The PSN Parameters dialog is displayed.
Note
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-118 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-85. Pseudowire ATM PSN Parameters
3. Click <Next>.
The Service Parameters dialog is displayed.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-119
Figure 3-86. Pseudowire ATM Service Parameters
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-120 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-87. Pseudowire TDM Service Parameters
4. Enter the parameters as described in Table 3-59.
5. Click <Finish> to complete the process.
A confirmation dialog is displayed.
Figure 3-88. Pseudowire Parameters Confirmation Dialog
6. Click <Finish> to complete the process.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-121
Table 3-60. Pseudowire General Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
PW Number Displays the PW number as defined in the PW
menu (read-only)
1– 66
PW Name Displays the PW name as defined in the PW menu
(read-only)
String 32 chars
PW Type
Defines the PW type and the type of data it
carries.
For more information about the different
encapsulation types, refer to Appendix E.
ATM VP 1 to 1
ATM VC 1 to 1
ATM VP N to 1
ATM VC N to 1
AAL5-SDU
SAToP
Basic CES PSN
Default: ATM VC N to 1
PW Sub Type When the PW type is Basic CES PSN, the subtype
indicates whether the PW is used for clock
recovery, clock distribution or data.
Note: In order to configure IP multicast clock distribution, the relevant PW should be created using an IP multicast peer.
Clock recovery
Clock distribution
Data
Default: Data
PSN Type The type of packet-switched network on which
this PW is established.
Note:
• UDPoIP is valid only for SAToP and Basic CES PSN pseudowire types.
• MPLSoIP cannot be selected when the PW subtype is clock recovery or clock distribution
• MPLSoGRE cannot be set with a peer that is routed through a PPPoE router interface.
MPLS
UDPoIP – UDP over IP
MPLSoIP - MPLS over IP
MPLSoGRE - MPLS over
GRE
Default: MPLSoIP
Peer Number of an existing PSN peer device (see
Defining PSN Peers) to which the current PW is
assigned. The PW terminates on this peer.
Note:
• When the provisioning mode is LDP PW ID (see below), the peer must be configured as a targeted peer.
• A peer with a multicast IP address can be set only for a clock distribution or a clock recovery PW.
• A peer that is routed through a PPPoE router interface cannot be set for MPLS over GRE.
• The peer number cannot be changed dynamicaly (on-the-fly).
1–32
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-122 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
Provisioning
mode
Determines whether the PW is established
manually or by LDP signaling
Manual
LDP PW ID
Default: Manual
PW ID A unique ID number that must be defined
identically on both the local and remote unit.
This ID is used to identify the PW connection
when labels are exchanged with LDP.
1–4294967295
Out PW label The PW label that is used in the outbound
direction. Relevant only if the provisioning mode
(see above) is set to Manual.
The out label's value range depends on the
selected PSN type.
1–4095 if the PSN type
is UDPoIP
16–1048575 for any
other PSN type
In PW label The PW label that is used in the inbound
direction. Not relevant for clock distribution.
If the PW is defined manually and the PSN type is
MPLS, MPLSoIP or MPLSoGRE, the PW value range
must be within the static label range.
1–4095 if the PSN type
is UDPoIP
Control Word
Support
Determines whether a control word is used
on this PW.
The control word can be disabled only in the
following PW types (see above):
• ATM VP 1 to 1
• ATM VC 1 to 1
• ATM VP N to 1
• ATM VC N to 1.
For detailed information about the control word
structure, refer to Appendix E.
Enable
Disable
Default: Enable
Sequence
Number Support
When disabled, the Sequence bit in the control
word equals zero (0). Relevant only if the control
word is enabled (see above).
Sequence numbering can be disabled only in the
following PW types:
• ATM VP 1 to 1
• ATM VC 1 to 1
• ATM VP N to 1
• ATM VC N to 1.
In addition, the AAL5-SDU PW type does not
support sequence numbering (set to Disable).
Enable
Disable
Default: Enable
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-123
Parameter Description Possible Values
TX queue The priority of the PW in the outbound direction
via the Ethernet port. Not relevant when the PW
subtype (see above) is clock recovery.
2 (highest priority)
3
4 (lowest priority)
Default:
4 for ATM VP 1 to 1,
ATM VC 1 to 1,
ATM VP N to 1,
ATM VC N to 1 and
AAL5-SDU
2 for SAToP and
Basic CES PSN
OAM mode Determines whether the OAM feature (using
VCCV-BFD messages) is enabled for this PW.
Not relevant if the PW type is SAToP, Basic
CES PSN or AAL5-SDU.
For more information about the VCCV-BFD
functionality, refer to Appendix F.
Disable
VCCV-BFD
Default: Disabled
Min TX interval
(μsec)
The minimum time interval in microseconds that
the system uses between transmitted BFD control
packets. Relevant only if the OAM mode
(see above) is set to VCCV-BFD.
1000000–4294967295
Default: 100000
Mix RX interval
(μsec)
The minimum time interval in microseconds that
the system uses between received BFD control
packets. Relevant only if the OAM mode
(see above) is set to VCCV-BFD.
1000000–4294967295
Default: 100000
Detection
multiplier
The negotiated transmit interval, multiplied by
this value, provides the detection time for the
transmitting system. Relevant only if the OAM
mode (see above) is set to VCCV-BFD.
2–60
Default: 5
TOS Value of the TOS byte that is used on outbound
traffic,
0-255
Default: 0
Exp. Bits The required value for the EXP bits. Visible only if
the EXP bits mode is set to Static.
0–7
Default: 0
VLAN Tagging Indicates if the VLAN tag is inserted into the TX
frames
Enable
Disable
Default: Disable
VLAN ID The ID of the VLAN carried in the VLAN tag
Note: This parameter only shows if VLAN tagging is enabled.
0 – 4094
Default: 0
VLAN Priority VLAN priority bits carried with the VLAN tag.
Note: This parameter only shows if VLAN tagging is enabled.
0–7
Default: 0
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-124 Setting the Operational Parameters RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
Max. Cells
Concatenation
Number of cells that may be concatenated for
encapsulation.
1–29
Default: 1
Timeout Mode Set whether timeout is enabled or disabled for
this PW.
Enable
Disable
Default: Enable
Timeout (μsecs) The timeout duration (if enabled). Enable
Disable
Default: Disable
AAL5 Mode Enabled or disabled for this PW. Enable
Disable
Default: Disable
MPLS Ingress
Tunnel
ID of the ingress tunnel
MPLS Egress
Tunnel
ID of the egress tunnel
Payload Size
(Frames in
Packet)
Number of TDM frames (bundles) within the
packet
2–256 for Basic CES PSN
2–16 for SAToP
Jitter Buffer
(μsec)
Length of the jitter buffer delay towards the
transmit direction (PSN to TDM).
1000-32000
Default: 3000
Attachment
Circuit Port
Port number of the attachment circuit
Bundle Time
Slots
The CES bundle time slots 1–32 for E1
1–24 for T1
Payload Size
(Bytes)
Total size of the of the payload (read only)
System Commands
System Commands allow you to perform the following functions on demand:
• Poll the agent
• Load the default configuration
• Reset the device
• View and swap files
• Save the active configuration as the default
To access the System Commands:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting the Operational Parameters 3-125
A light blue frame surrounds the device image and the main menu becomes available.
2. From the main menu, select Configuration > System Commands;
The System Commands menu is displayed.
Figure 3-89. System Commands Menu
Poll Agent
To poll the agent:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame surrounds the device image and the main menu becomes available.
2. From the main menu, select Poll Agent;
The NMS polls the SNMP agent.
Default Configuration
To reset the configuration to the default settings:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame surrounds the device image and the main menu becomes available.
2. From the main menu, select Default Configuration;
If authorized, the agent is instantly reconfigured to the default settings otherwise the agent is disconnected.
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-126 Additional Tasks RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
3.3 Additional Tasks
This section describes:
• Viewing and Swapping Software Files
• Resetting to Default Configuration
• Viewing the License Status
• Restarting the Unit.
Viewing and Swapping Software Files
The SW Files option allows you to view software information and to swap the main operating and backup software files.
To view software information:
1. From the Configuration menu, select System Commands.
2. Select SW Files.
The SW Files dialog box appears.
Figure 3-90. SW Files Dialog Box
Table 3-61. SW Files Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW/RO)
Running The active software version of the
device.
(Read only)
Main The main software version of the device (Read only)
Backup The backup software version of the
device
(Read only)
<Swap Main and
Backup>
Allows you to swap the main and backup
software files of the device.
<Close> Closes the SW Files dialog box.
User's Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Additional Tasks 3-127
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW/RO)
<Refresh> Retrieves and displays the most current
software file information.
To swap main and backup software files:
1. Click <Swap Main and Backup>.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
Figure 3-91. Swapping Confirmation Dialog Box
2. Click the type of swap you require (see Table 3-62).
Table 3-62. Swapping Confirmation Buttons
Button Description
<Swap Only> Swaps the main and backup software files of
the device.
<Swap and
Reset>
Swaps the main and backup software files of
the device and on reset activates the new
software.
<Cancel> Closes the swapping confirmation dialog box
without making any changes.
Resetting to Default Configuration
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 configuration can be reset to the preset default configuration.
To reset the unit:
1. From the Configuration menu, select System Commands.
2. From the System Commands menu, select Default Configuration.
A confirmation dialog appears.
Chapter 3 Configuration Management User's Manual
3-128 Additional Tasks RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 3-92. Restore Default Configuration
Viewing the License Status
When necessary, you can view the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 license status.
To view the license status:
1. From the Options menu, select License Status.
2. If necessary, select Refresh.
The license status dialog appears.
Figure 3-93. License Status
Restarting the Unit
When necessary, you can restart the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 device.
To restart the unit:
1. From the Configuration menu, select System Commands.
2. Select Reset.
A confirmation message appears.
3. Click <OK>.
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Configuring Emulated ATM/TDM Services over PSN 4-1
Chapter 4
Configuring a Typical Application This chapter describes the configuration of ACE-3100, ACE-3200 in a typical application, and provides a practical configuration example for implementing it.
4.1 Configuring Emulated ATM/TDM Services over PSN
Overview
Figure 4-1 illustrates a typical application, in which two Node B units (1 and 2) are connected to ACE-3100 and ACE-3200 (1), and one BTS unit is connected to ACE-3200 (2). In this application, the ACE-3100 and two ACE-3200 units serve as the remote cell-site gateways.
Node B (1) is connected to ACE-3100 via an STM-1/OC-3 link, and Node B (2) is connected to ACE-3200 (1) via an E1/T1 IMA link. The BTS is connected to ACE-3200 (2) via an E1/T1 TDM links.
On the central site side, ACE-3400 serves as the central RNC/BSC-site gateway. The RNC is connected to ACE-3400 via an STM-1/OC-3 link, and the BSC is connected to ACE-3400 via E1/T1 TDM links.
On the ACE-3400 side, one VP connection and one VC connection are configured for each remote gateway unit that connected to Node B. In addition, two TDM PW connections are configured for the remote ACE-3200 connected to the BTS:
• One SAToP PW is configured an via unframed E1/T1 TDM link
• One Basic CES PSN PW is configured via a bundle containing N framed E1/T1 links.
The RNC provides the timing reference for ACE-3400 and for the BSC, and the clock is then distributed over the PSN towards ACE-3100 and ACE-3200, both able to recover the clock (using a clock recovery hardware component).
A network management station connected to the PSN can manage all units over IP-based format.
Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application User's Manual
4-2 Configuring Emulated ATM/TDM Services over PSN RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 4-1. Emulated ATM Services over PSN
As illustrated in Figure 4-1, the Network Management Station connected to the Packet Switched Network can manage all units over IP-based format.
Configuration Sequence
The configuration process on the cell site(s) side consists of:
a. Configuring ACE-3100
b. Configuring ACE-3200 (1)
c. Configuring ACE-3200 (2).
Instructions regarding ACE-3400 for this typical application can be found in the ACE-3400, ACE-3402 Installation and Operation Manual.
The IP addresses and IP masks presented in this chapter are only an example. You should set the IP and mask addresses according to the actual network parameters.
Note
User's Manual Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Configuring ACE-3100 4-3
4.2 Configuring ACE-3100
This section describes the configuration of the ACE-3100 unit that appears in Figure 4-1. The configuration stages are:
• Configuring the Port Layer Parameters – which includes:
Configuring the ATM-155 Ports
Configuring the Ethernet Ports
• Configuring the Application Parameters – which includes:
Configuring the Router Parameters
Configuring the Traffic Descriptors
Configuring the General Multiservice PW over PSN Parameters
Configuring the Remote Peer Parameters
Configuring the Pseudowire Parameters
• Setting the Clock Source.
Configuring the Port Layer Parameters
Configuring the ATM-155 Ports
To configure the ATM layer of an ATM-155 port:
1. Double-click the ATM-155 Port in the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
Figure 4-2. ATM-155 Port Dialog Box
2. In the ATM-155 Port dialog box, click <ATM>.
A light blue frame appears around the ATM layer.
Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application User's Manual
4-4 Configuring ACE-3100 RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
3. From the Configuration menu of the ATM-155 Port menu bar, select Parameters.
Figure 4-3. ATM-155 ATM Layer
4. Configure the parameters for the port as required.
Table 4-1. ATM-155 ATM Port Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO/RW)
Port The ATM-155 port number ATM-155 1–2 (Read
Only)
Type The ATM-155 layer ATM (Read Only)
Output Rate
(cell/sec)
The port’s cell output (Tx) rate 100-353208
OAM Cell
Generation
The OAM cell generation mode for the
ATM layer.
Enable
Disable
For APS functionality (if required), configure the same parameters for Port 2.
Configuring the Ethernet Ports
To configure the Ethernet parameters:
1. Double-click the ETH port on the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 device image.
Note
User's Manual Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Configuring ACE-3100 4-5
Figure 4-4. ETH Port Dialog Box
2. Click <ETHERNET>.
A light blue frame appears around the ETHERNET layer’s label, and the top menu bar becomes available.
When the ETHERNET layer is not selected, the ETH Port menu bar is disabled.
3. From the Configuration menu, select <Parameters>.
The Port Parameters dialog box is displayed.
Figure 4-5. ETH Port Parameters Dialog Box
Table 4-2. ETH Port Parameters
Parameter Value
Port number 1
Administrative Status Up
Note
Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application User's Manual
4-6 Configuring ACE-3100 RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Value
Auto negotiation Enable
Max. capability advertised 100BaseT Full Duplex
Output Rate Limit No Limit
Configuring the Application Parameters
The ACE-3100 application configuration includes:
• Router parameters
• Traffic descriptor parameters
• General multiservice over PSN parameters
• Remote peer parameters
• Pseudowire parameters (clock recovery, ATM VP and ATM VC over PSN).
Configuring the Router Parameters
To configure the router parameters:
1. From the Configuration menu, select Router > Parameters.
The Router Parameters dialog box is displayed.
Figure 4-6. Router Parameters
2. Set the Router parameters as follows:
Table 4-3. Router Parameters
Parameter Value
System Address 172.17.152.53
User's Manual Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Configuring ACE-3100 4-7
Parameter Value
Router Interface 1
ARP Aging Time (sec) 1200
Configuring the Traffic Descriptors
To configure the traffic descriptors:
1. From the Configuration menu, select ATM > Traffic Descriptor.
The Traffic Descriptor dialog box is displayed.
Figure 4-7. Traffic Descriptor Dialog Box
2. Click <Add>.
The Add Traffic Descriptor dialog box is displayed.
Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application User's Manual
4-8 Configuring ACE-3100 RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 4-8. Add Traffic Descriptor Dialog Box
Table 4-4. Traffic Descriptor Parameters
Parameter Value
Index 6
Service category uBR
Mode Scheduling
PCR 100
CDVT 1
SCR 100
MBS 1
MDCR 100
3. After saving the TD parameters above, set another TD with the following VCoPSN parameters:
Parameter Value
Traffic descriptor number 7
Service category CBR
Shaping mode Shaped
PCR 6000
CDVT (μsec) 1
SCR 6000
MBS 1
User's Manual Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Configuring ACE-3100 4-9
Parameter Value
MDCR 6000
Configuring the General Multiservice PW over PSN Parameters
To configure the general Multiservice over PSN parameters:
• From the Configuration menu, select Multi Service over PSN > General > ATM
The Multi Service over PSN – ATM Parameters dialog box is displayed.
Figure 4-9. Multiservice over PSN Dialog Box
Table 4-5. Multiservice over PSN Parameters
Parameter Value
Misorder window size 8
Reordering Enable
Configuring the Remote Peer Parameters
To configure the peer parameters for the remote ACE-3400:
1. From the Configuration menu, select Multi Service over PSN > Peer
The Peer Table dialog box is displayed.
Figure 4-10. Peer Table Dialog Box
Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application User's Manual
4-10 Configuring ACE-3100 RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
2. Click <Add>.
The Peer Add dialog box is displayed.
Figure 4-11. Peer Add Dialog Box
Table 4-6. Peer Add Parameters
Parameter Value
Peer number 1
Peer name Peer-1
Peer IP address 172.17.143.100
Configuring the Pseudowire Parameters
In this application, ACE-3100 requires two pseudowire links for ATM VC/VP over PSN, and one pseudowire link for the clock recovery channel. In total, three different pseudowire configurations are required.
Each pseudowire configuration consists of:
a. General PW parameters
b. PSN parameters
c. Service parameters (not relevant for the clock recovery PW).
To configure a PW link:
1. On the PW menu (Configuration> Multiservice over PSN> PW), set the PW number and name.
2. On the General Parameters submenu (Configuration> Multiservice over PSN> PW> General parameters), set the general PW parameters for the PW.
3. On the PSN Parameters submenu (Configuration> Multiservice over PSN> PW> PSN parameters), set the PSN parameters for the PW.
4. On the Service Parameters submenu (Configuration> Multiservice over PSN> PW> Service parameters), set the service parameters for the PW.
For an ATM PW, save the parameters before entering the attachment circuit parameters (Configuration> Multiservice over PSN> PW> Service parameters> Attachment circuit). The attachment circuit parameters can then be saved separately.
Note
User's Manual Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Configuring ACE-3100 4-11
5. Save the PW link parameters.
Setting the Clock Source
To configure the clock source for ACE-3100:
1. From the Configuration menu, select Clock > Source
The Clock Source dialog box opens.
Figure 4-12. Clock Source Dialog Box
Table 4-7. Clock Source Parameters
Parameter Value
Active Clock Internal
Source Rx Clock
Fallback None
Revertive Yes
Wait to Restore 1
Port ATM-155 1
Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application User's Manual
4-12 Configuring ACE-3200 (1) RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
4.3 Configuring ACE-3200 (1)
This section describes the configuration of the ACE-3200 (1) unit that appears in Figure 4-1. The configuration stages are:
• Configuring the Port Parameters – which includes:
Configuring the E1 Ports to IMA Mode
Configuring the Ethernet Ports
• Configuring the Application Parameters – which includes:
Defining an IMA Group
Configuring the Router Parameters
Configuring the Traffic Descriptors
Configuring the General Multiservice PW over PSN Parameters
Configuring the Remote Peer Parameters
Configuring the Pseudowire Parameters
• Setting the Clock Source.
Configuring the Port Parameters
Configuring the E1 Ports to IMA Mode
To configure an E1 port:
1. Double-click the E1 Port in the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame appears around the layer’s label, and the top menu bar becomes available.
2. Select Configuration > Parameters
The Port Parameters dialog box is displayed.
User's Manual Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Configuring ACE-3200 (1) 4-13
Figure 4-13. E1 Port Parameters Dialog Box
Table 4-8. E1 Port Parameters
Parameter Value
Port number E1 2
Mode CES-ATM
Administrative Status Up
RX sensitivity High
Line type CRC enabled
Transmit clock source System
Idle code 7E
Trunk Condition FF
The same parameters should be defined for all E1 ports in the required IMA group (ports 1–8).
Configuring the Ethernet Ports
To configure the Ethernet parameters:
1. Double-click the ETH port on the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 device image.
Note
Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application User's Manual
4-14 Configuring ACE-3200 (1) RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 4-14. ETH Port Dialog Box
2. Click <ETHERNET>.
A light blue frame appears around the ETHERNET layer’s label, and the top menu bar becomes available.
When the ETHERNET layer is not selected, the ETH Port menu bar is disabled.
3. From the Configuration menu, select <Parameters>.
The Port Parameters dialog box is displayed.
Figure 4-15. ETH Port Parameters Dialog Box
4. Set the following parameters for each Ethernet port:
Parameter Value
Port number 1
Port activation Enable
Note
User's Manual Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Configuring ACE-3200 (1) 4-15
Parameter Value
Auto negotiation Enable
Max. capability advertised 100BaseT Full Duplex
Rate limiter Disable
Configuring the Application Parameters
The ACE-3200 (1) application configuration includes:
• IMA group parameters
• Router parameters
• Traffic descriptor parameters
• General multiservice over PSN parameters
• Remote peer parameters
• Pseudowire parameters (clock recovery, ATM VP and ATM VC over PSN).
Defining an IMA Group
To define an IMA group:
1. From the Configuration menu, select ATM > IMA Group
The IMA Group Table dialog box opens.
Figure 4-16. IMA Group Table Dialog Box
2. Click <Add>.
The Add IMA Group Table dialog box opens.
Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application User's Manual
4-16 Configuring ACE-3200 (1) RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
3. Set the following parameters:
Parameter Value
Number 1
Type E1
Min RX/TX links 1
Group ID 0
TX frame length (cells) 128
Max differential delay (ms) 25
Blocking Unblock
IMA version 1.1
Common TX clock source System
Links in group 1–8
Configuring the Router Parameters
To configure the router parameters:
1. From the Configuration menu, select Router > Parameters.
The Router Parameters dialog box is displayed.
User's Manual Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Configuring ACE-3200 (1) 4-17
Figure 4-17. Router Parameters Dialog Box
Table 4-9. Router Parameters
Parameter Value
System Address 172.17.152.53
ARP Aging Time (sec) 1200
2. On the Default Gateway in the Router Parameters dialog, using the <…> button, select the following parameters:
Parameter Value
Router interface 1
Gateway IP address 172.17.152.1
Configuring the Traffic Descriptors
To configure the traffic descriptors:
1. From the Configuration menu, select ATM > Traffic Descriptor.
The Traffic descriptor Table dialog box is displayed.
Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application User's Manual
4-18 Configuring ACE-3200 (1) RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 4-18. Traffic Descriptor Dialog Box
2. Click <Add> to add a new traffic descriptor.
The Add Traffic Descriptor dialog box is displayed.
Figure 4-19. Traffic Descriptor Add Dialog Box
Table 4-10. Traffic Descriptor VPoPSN Parameters
Parameter Value
Index 6
Service category LBR
Mode Shaped
PCR (cell/sec) 3000
CDVT (μsec) 1
User's Manual Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Configuring ACE-3200 (1) 4-19
Parameter Value
SCR (cell/sec) 100
MBS (cell) 1
MDCR (cell/sec) 100
3. After saving the TD parameters above, set another TD with the following VCoPSN parameters:
Parameter Value
Index 7
Service category CBR
Mode Shaped
PCR 6000
CDVT (μsec) 1
SCR (cell/sec) 100
MBS (cell) 1
MDCR (cell/sec) 100
Configuring the General Multiservice PW over PSN Parameters
To configure the general multiservice over PSN parameters:
• From the Configuration menu, select Multiservice over PSN > General > ATM.
The Multiservice over PSN – ATM Parameters dialog box is displayed.
Figure 4-20. Multiservice over PSN Dialog Box
Table 4-11. Multiservice over PSN Parameters
Parameter Value
Misorder Window Size 8
Reordering Enable
Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application User's Manual
4-20 Configuring ACE-3200 (1) RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Configuring the Remote Peer Parameters
To configure the peer parameters for the remote ACE-3400:
1. From the Configuration menu, select Multiservice over PSN > Peer.
The Peer Table dialog box is displayed.
Figure 4-21. Peer Table Dialog Box
2. Click <Add> to add a peer table.
The Add Peer dialog box is displayed.
Figure 4-22. Add Peer Dialog Box
Table 4-12. Add Peer Parameters
Parameter Value
Peer number 1
Peer name Peer-1
Peer IP address 172.17.143.100
User's Manual Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Configuring ACE-3200 (1) 4-21
Configuring the Pseudowire Parameters
In this application, ACE-3200 (1) requires two pseudowire links for ATM VC, ATM VP, and one pseudowire link for the clock recovery channel. In total, three different pseudowire configurations are required.
Each pseudowire configuration consists of:
a. General PW parameters
b. PSN parameters
c. Service parameters (not relevant for the clock recovery PW).
Refer to the PW link creation steps on page 4-10.
The following tables detail the required parameters of each PW link:
Table 4-13. ACE-3200 (1) – Clock Recovery PW
PW Submenu Parameter Value
— PW number 1
— PW name PW-1
General PW type Basic CES PSN
PW subtype Clock recovery
PSN type UDPoIP
Peer number 1
Provisioning
mode
Manual
In PW label 100
Control word Enable
PSN TOS 0
VLAN tag Disable
Table 4-14. ACE-3200 (1) – Data PW for VP (200)
PW Submenu Parameter Value
— PW number 2
— PW name PW-2
General PW type ATM VP N to 1
PSN type MPLSoIP
Peer number 1
Provisioning
mode
Manual
Out PW label 201
Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application User's Manual
4-22 Configuring ACE-3200 (1) RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
PW Submenu Parameter Value
In PW label 201
Control word Enable
Sequence number Enable
TX queue 4- Low
OAM mode Enable
PSN TOS 0
EXP bits 0
VLAN tag Disable
Service Max cells concatenation 5
Timeout mode Enable
PW timeout (μsec) 100
AAL5 mode Disable
Attachment circuit Port type IMA-Group
Port number 1
VPI 200
VPI to PSN 200
VPI from PSN 200
TD 2
OD 3
Table 4-15. ACE-3200 (1) – Data PW for VC (0/200)
PW Submenu Parameter Value
— PW number 3
— PW name PW-3
General PW type ATM VC N to 1
PSN type MPLSoIP
Peer number 1
Provisioning
mode
Manual
Out PW label 202
In PW label 202
Control word Enable
Sequence number Enable
TX queue 4- Low
User's Manual Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Configuring ACE-3200 (1) 4-23
PW Submenu Parameter Value
OAM mode Enable
PSN TOS 0
EXP bits 0
VLAN tag Disable
Service Max cells concatenation 5
Timeout mode Enable
Timeout (μsec) 100
AAL5 mode Disable
Attachment circuit Port type IMA-Group
Port number 1
VPI 0
VCI 200
VPI to PSN 0
VCI to PSN 200
VPI from PSN 0
VCI from PSN 200
TD 3
OD 3
Setting the Clock Source
To configure the clock source for ACE-3200 (1):
1. From the Configuration menu, select Clock > Recovered.
The Recovered Clock Table dialog box is displayed.
2. Click <Add> to add a recovered clock.
The Add Recovered Clock dialog box is displayed.
Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application User's Manual
4-24 Configuring ACE-3200 (1) RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 4-23. Add Recovered Clock Dialog Box
Table 4-16. Add Recovered Clock Parameters
Parameter Value
ID 1
Administrative Status Up
Type Adaptive
PW number 1
Source quality Stratum 1
Network type Type B
3. On the Master Clock menu (Configuration> System> Clock> Recovered clock), set the following parameters:
Parameter Value
Source Recovered
Recovered ID 1
User's Manual Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Configuring ACE-3200 (2) 4-25
4.4 Configuring ACE-3200 (2)
This section describes the configuration of the ACE-3200 (2) unit that appears in Figure 4-1. The configuration stages are:
• Configuring the Port Layer Parameters – which includes:
Configuring the E1/T1 Ports to CES-PSN Mode
Configuring the Ethernet Ports
• Configuring the Application Parameters – which includes:
Configuring the Router Interface
Configuring the General Multiservice PW over PSN Parameters
Configuring the Remote Peer Parameters
Configuring the Pseudowire Parameters
• Setting the Clock Source.
Configuring the Port Layer Parameters
Configuring the E1/T1 Ports to CES-PSN Mode
To configure the E1 ports:
• From the Configuration menu of the E1 Port menu bar, select Parameters for two E1 ports (framed and unframed):
Table 4-17. Framed E1 Port 1
Parameter Value
Port E1 1
Mode CES-PSN
Administrative Status Up
RX sensitivity Low
Line type CRC enabled
Transmit Clock Source System
Idle code 7E
Trunk condition FF
Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application User's Manual
4-26 Configuring ACE-3200 (2) RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Table 4-18. Unframed E1 Port 2
Parameter Value
Port E1 1
Mode CES-PSN
Administrative Status Up
RX sensitivity Low
Line type Unframed
Transmit clock source System
Idle code 7E
Configuring the Ethernet Ports
To configure the Ethernet parameters:
• From the Configuration menu of the ETH menu bar, select Parameters for each Ethernet port.
Figure 4-24. Port Parameters Dialog Box
Table 4-19. Port Parameters
Parameter Value
Port ETH 1
Administrative Status Up
Auto negotiation Enable
Max. capability advertised 100BaseT Full Duplex
Output Rate Limit No Limit
User's Manual Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Configuring ACE-3200 (2) 4-27
Configuring the Application Parameters
The ACE-3200 (2) application configuration includes:
• Router parameters
• General multiservice over PSN parameters
• Remote peer parameters
• Pseudowire parameters (clock recovery and TDM over PSN).
Configuring the Router Interface
To configure the router parameters:
1. From the Configuration menu, select Router > Interfaces.
The Router Interfaces Table dialog box is displayed.
Figure 4-25. Router Interface Add Dialog Box
Table 4-20. Router Interface Parameters
Parameter Value
Number 2
Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application User's Manual
4-28 Configuring ACE-3200 (2) RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Value
Name Interface-2
IP address 172.17.143.202
IP mask 255.255.255.0
Interface type Ethernet
Port number 1
VLAN tagging Disable
2. On the Default Gateway menu (Configuration> Router> Default gateway), set the following parameters:
Parameter Value
Gateway interface number 1
Gateway IP address 172.17.143.1
Configuring the General Multiservice PW over PSN Parameters
To configure the general multiservice over PSN parameters:
• On the General menu (Configuration> Multiservice over PSN> General> ATM parameters)
Figure 4-26. Multiservice over PSN Dialog Box
Table 4-21. Multiservice over PSN Parameters
Parameter Value
Misorder window size 8
Reordering Enable
Configuring the Remote Peer Parameters
To configure the peer parameters for the remote ACE-3400:
• On the Peer menu (Configuration> Multiservice over PSN> Peer), set the following parameters.
User's Manual Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Configuring ACE-3200 (2) 4-29
Figure 4-27. Add Peer Dialog Box
Table 4-22. Add Peer Parameters
Parameter Value
Peer number 1
Peer name Peer-1
Peer IP address 172.17.143.100
Configuring the Pseudowire Parameters
In this application, ACE-3200 (2) requires two pseudowire links for TDM over PSN (one CESoPSN PW and one SAToP PW), and one pseudowire link for the clock recovery channel. In total, three different pseudowire configurations are required.
Each pseudowire configuration consists of:
a. General PW parameters
b. PSN parameters
c. Service parameters (not relevant for the clock recovery PW).
Refer to the PW link creation steps on page 4-10.
The following tables detail the required parameters of each PW link:
Table 4-23. ACE-3200 (2) – Clock Recovery PW
PW Submenu Parameter Value
— PW number 1
— PW name PW-1
General PW type Basic CES PSN
PW subtype Clock recovery
PSN type UDPoIP
Peer number 1
Provisioning
mode
Manual
In PW label 100
Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application User's Manual
4-30 Configuring ACE-3200 (2) RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
PW Submenu Parameter Value
Control word Enable
PSN TOS 0
VLAN tag Disable
Table 4-24. ACE-3200 (2) – Basic CES PES PW
PW Submenu Parameter Value
— PW number 2
— PW name PW-2
General PW type Basic CES PSN
PW subtype Data
PSN type MPLSoIP
Peer number 1
Provisioning
mode
Manual
Out PW label 300
In PW label 300
Control word Enable
TX queue 2 - High
PSN TOS 0
EXP bits 0
VLAN tag Disable
Service Payload size
(frames in packet)
8
Payload size (bytes) 128
Jitter buffer (μsec) 3000
Attachment circuit E1 port number 1
Bundle time slots 1–16
Table 4-25. ACE-3200 (2) – SAToP PW
PW Submenu Parameter Value
— PW number 3
— PW name PW-3
General PW type SAToP
PW subtype Data
User's Manual Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Configuring ACE-3200 (2) 4-31
PW Submenu Parameter Value
PSN type MPLSoIP
Peer number 1
Provisioning
mode
Manual
Out PW label 301
In PW label 301
Control word Enable
TX queue 2 - High
PSN TOS 0
VLAN tag Disable
Service Payload size
(32 bytes in packet)
16
Payload size (bytes) 512
Jitter buffer (μsec) 2000
Attachment circuit E1 port number 1
Setting the Clock Source
To configure the clock source for ACE-3200 (2):
1. On the Recovered Clock menu (Configuration> System> Clock> Recovered clock) click <Add>.
The dialog is displayed.
Figure 4-28. Add Recovered Clock Dialog Box
Chapter 4 Configuring a Typical Application User's Manual
4-32 Configuring ACE-3200 (2) RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Table 4-26. Add Recovered Clock Parameters
Parameter Value
ID 1
Activity Enable
Type Adaptive
PW number 1
Source quality Stratum 1
Network type Type B
2. On the Source Clock menu (Configuration> System> Clock> Source), set the following parameters:
Parameter Value
Source Recovered
Recovered ID 1
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Introduction 5-1
Chapter 5
Performance Management This chapter describes the various options for monitoring the performance of ACE-3100, ACE-3200. The chapter first discusses the ways of viewing the statistics, and then the details of the statistics that can be viewed.
5.1 Introduction
Statistic Tables and Graphs
The statistics dialog boxes display both visual and numerical information, in graphs and tables.
RADview ACE-3100, ACE-3200 provides two types of statistics:
• Current statistics – Statistical information regarding the current interval
• Intervals statistics – Statistical information regarding the last 24 hours
These two types of statistics are displayed in dialog boxes that include:
• Title bar – Displays the host selection name and address, graph name, and the current date and time (Agent time).
• Object/parameter fields – The objects and parameters for which the statistical information appears. For example: IMA group number.
• Graph – Customizable colored graph that represents the statistical information, including an explanatory legend of the graph colors.
• Numerical data – Displayed in a table that summarizes the parameter values of the statistical report.
• Common buttons:
Poll – When clicked, ACE-3100, ACE-3200 retrieves the most current information and refreshes the displayed statistics accordingly. The button is available only for the current dialog box and useful when the interval polling is long. When the polling takes place, the button is temporarily disabled.
Close – Closes the statistics dialog box.
• Status Bar – Indicates the SNMP status in the format: "<x> sec. to next polling", where x is the number of seconds left until the next polling.
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-2 Introduction RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Graph Characteristics
Vertical Axis Scale
The vertical axis is dynamic and displays the highest value of the displayed parameters. When you hide some parameters, both the scale and highest value change accordingly.
Horizontal Axis
• Current graph – For the current graph, the horizontal axis represents the time elapsed. When you open the graph, the horizontal axis range of the values is the minimum time elapsed in seconds. You can select a different polling interval value to refresh the graph automatically at every interval as selected. The default polling interval value is 10 seconds.
• Intervals graph – The graph displays the interval. The most recent interval appears on the right side of the horizontal axis, while the earliest interval appears at the origin (left side) of the horizontal axis.
• The value at the start point of the horizontal axis is not displayed.
• If there is not enough space for displaying time labels for each interval, only some of the intervals are designated with the time label, while the others are only designated with dots.
Interval Date and Time
For interval statistics, the start time is set according to the NMS (Network Management Station) clock. If the NMS and Agent clocks are not synchronized, the result could be different interval start times in the ASCII terminal and the NMS.
You can synchronize the NMS and Agent clocks by using either the Net Date and Time or the Date and Time auto-mode shell application. The time synchronization takes effect only after the current interval period is concluded.
Number of Displayed Polls
You can define the number of the displayed polls as a function of the polling interval. The number (n) of displayed polls is as follows:
(n) = 900 / polls per second + 1 + 30 optional manual polls
If you perform more than 30 manual polls, the earliest polls are discarded.
Customizing the Appearance of Graph Lines
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 allows you to customize the appearance of lines that appear in the graph.
Note
Note
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Introduction 5-3
To display or hide a specific line in the graph:
• Click the line’s legend parameter.
If the selected parameter is the only one in the legend, its graph line cannot be hidden.
To modify the appearance of a graph line:
1. Right-click the line’s legend parameter.
The line appearance options pop-up menu appears.
2. From the pop-up menu, select the appearance option that should be implemented on the parameter’s graph line: Bold, Normal, Invisible, Hide Others, or Show All.
Table 5-1. Graph Line Appearance Options
Option Description Remark
Bold Turns the graph line of the selected legend
parameter to a bold line.
Only one bold line can appear in the graph at a
time. Therefore, when a newly selected
parameter’s line becomes bold, the previously bold
line becomes regular.
Selecting Bold also causes an invisible graph line to
become visible in bold.
This option is disabled for
a parameter that is
already bold.
Normal Turns the graph line of the selected parameter to
regular (if it was bold).
Normal also causes an invisible parameter to
become visible in regular fonts.
This option is disabled for
a parameter that is
already normal.
Invisible Turns the graph line to invisible. This option is disabled if
the selected parameter is
already invisible, or if it is
the only visible parameter
in the legend list.
Hide Others Turns all the parameters except for the selected
one to invisible.
If after this operation you select Normal or Bold
for another parameter, both parameters are
displayed while all the others remain invisible.
This option is disabled if
the selected parameter is
invisible or if it is the only
one visible.
Show All Causes all the graph lines to be displayed.
This option is useful when some parameters are
hidden and you want to make them all visible.
Note
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-4 Introduction RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Numerical Value Tooltip
When the mouse pointer is placed over the dots representing a certain sample, or when it is very close to it, a tooltip appears on the top-left side of the sample point displaying the point’s vertical axis numerical value.
Setting the Polling Interval
Use the polling interval option to specify the frequency by which the statistics data is refreshed.
To set the polling interval:
3. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame appears around the device image.
4. From the Statistics menu, select Polling Interval.
Figure 5-1. Statistics Menu
Figure 5-2. Polling Interval Dialog Box
5. Enter the required polling interval, either by typing a value or by using the arrows, and click <Set>.
Table 5-2. Polling Interval Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW)
Polling Interval
Polling interval in seconds 5–60, in increments of 5
Default: 10
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Introduction 5-5
• Changing the polling interval affects all current statistics dialog boxes, for all levels and ports.
• The new polling interval takes effect only after the next automatic polling occurs, or after you click <Refresh>.
Manually Polling the Agent
You can instruct ACE-3100, ACE-3200 to immediately poll data from the Agent and update the polling information as necessary.
To poll the agent:
1. From the Configuration menu, select System Commands.
2. Select Poll Agent.
The system immediately polls the agent and updates the displayed information.
Table 5-3. Polled MIB Objects
No. Parameter/MIB Object Description
1 3418.sysObjectID Detects whether the device has been
changed between polling sessions
2 Rad.sysSaPorts Checks for existing ports and their types,
when necessary
3 Rad.modlParamLeds Displays the module LEDs, their colors, and
their status
4 2863.ifOperStatus and
2863.ifAdminStatus of each
existing physical interface
Displays the existing ports and their status
5 Rad.prtParamAlarmIndication (of
each existing physical interface)
Displays existing ports and their status
(aggregation of all ports’ levels)
6 Rad.physicalConnector Displays the correct connector of existing
ports
7 rad.portBalance
(for E1 ports only)
Display the correct port impedance
(balanced/unbalanced)
8 rad.systemPsType Displays the correct type of power supplies
9 rad.systemPsStatus Displays the status of power supply/s
10 rad.agnFans Displays the correct status of fans
If the Rad.sysSaPorts, 3418.sysObjectID or Rad.physicalConnector parameters do not match the values of the other parameters, a warning message appears and you must close and restart the application.
Note
Note
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-6 Monitoring the System RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
5.2 Monitoring the System
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 constantly monitors the system, and provides on-going performance statistics.
Figure 5-3. Statistics Menu
Displaying the Clock Performance
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 can distribute the ATM timing over packet-switched. An optional hardware component allows ACE-3100, ACE-3200 to recover the timing from a dedicated PW clock stream received from the PSN.
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 is also available with an external clock recovery module which requires a suitable software license pack.
To view the clock statistics:
1. From the Statistics menu, select Clock > Recovered.
A recovered clock menu is displayed.
Figure 5-4. Clock Menu
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the System 5-7
Figure 5-5. Recovered Clock Statistics
Table 5-4. Recovered Clock Statistics
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW)
ID Clock source port ID
Administrative
Status
Clock recovery functionality Up
Down
Type Type or method of clock recovery Adaptive
PW Number of the PW connection on which the
clock stream is carried. Up to 32 PWs for
data, 32 PWs for clock distribution, and up
to 2 PWs for clock recovery.
1-66
Source Quality Accuracy level of the recovered clock source Stratum1
Stratum2
Stratum3
Stratum3E
Stratum4
Network Type The PSN type.
For more information, refer to Appendix D
of the hardware manual.
Type A
Type B
Type C
Clock State Clock source port state Free Run
Frequency
Acquisition
Rapid Phase Lock
Fine Phase Lock
Holdover
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-8 Monitoring the System RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Viewing Abis Statistics
Abis is supported for up to 6 E1 ports only. Abis is not available for T1 ports
Figure 5-6. Abis Statistics Table
Displaying the Protection Status
The protection monitoring options allow you to view the current status of all protected hardware components, depending on your specific hardware unit.
To access the protection monitoring options:
• From the Statistics menu, select Protection.
The Protection menu is displayed.
Figure 5-7. Protection Menu
Viewing Physical APS Table
You can view details of all physical APSs as well as physical APS statistics.
To display the details of all physical APS protections:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame appears around the device image.
2. From the Statistics menu, select Physical APS….
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the System 5-9
Figure 5-8. APS Statistics Table dialog box
Table 5-5. APS Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Current Number of
Entries
The current number of APS groups
defined in the APS table.
Maximum Number
of Entries
The maximum number of APS groups
that can be defined.
Group ID The group ID of the APS User selection
Mode The APS operation mode 1+1 Optimized
Bi-directional
Working Port The working port corresponding to
ATM-155 1
ATM-155 1
Protection Port The working port corresponding to
ATM-155 2
ATM-155 2
Revertive Whether the Revertive mode is enabled,
i.e. – whether the master clock will
return to be the system clock after a
period of unavailability
Yes
No
Default: No
Wait To Restore
(sec)
The Wait to Restore time 1–720
Default: 300
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-10 Monitoring the System RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Switch Command The APS switch command menu. None (initial state)
Clear
Force Switch to
Protection
Force Switch to
Working
Forced Switch
Lockout
Lockout of Protection
Manual Switch to
Protection
Manual Switch to
Working
• Clicking <Statistics…> opens the Physical APS Statistics dialog box.
• <Statistics…> is disabled when no entry is selected.
Viewing the Physical APS Statistics
To display the physical APS statistics:
• In the Physical APS Table dialog box, click <Statistics>.
Note
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the System 5-11
Figure 5-9. Physical APS Statistics Dialog Box
Table 5-6. Physical APS Table Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
APS Group ID The unique identifier of the configured APS group
Only one APS group can be configured
User selection
Rx K1 K2 Byte The content of the received K1K2 bytes, which are
exchanged on APS ports
Hex value
Tx K1 K2 Byte The content of the transmitted K1K2 bytes, which are
exchanged on APS ports
Hex value
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-12 Monitoring the System RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Signal Failures (SF) Status: Indicates the existence of signal failures
Total Counters: Indicates the number of signal failures
Status: On, Off
Total Counters:
number
Signal Degraded (SD) Status: Indicates the existence of signal degradation
Total Counters: Indicates the number of signal
degradation occurrences
Status: On, Off
Total Counters:
number
Displaying the Syslog Status
System events are logged by date and time. To allow logging/sharing of system events on a server instead of internally, the Syslog server parameters must be configured.
To view the Syslog Status:
• From the Configuration menu, select Syslog.
The Syslog Status window is displayed.
Figure 5-10. Syslog
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the Physical Ports Performance 5-13
5.3 Monitoring the Physical Ports Performance
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 provides for monitoring each port individually.
Statistical are provided in live graphs that can be monitored on-line. Selecting an element from the legend box hides the colored icon for purposes of identification.
Displaying the Ethernet Port Statistics
To view the ETHERNET port current statistics:
1. In the ETHERNET port’s graphic layers image, click the ETHERNET layer rectangle.
A light blue frame appears around the layer.
Figure 5-11. Ethernet Port Dialog Box
2. From the Statistics menu, select Current.
An Rx/Tx menu appears.
Figure 5-12. Ethernet Statistics Current Rx/Tx Menu
3. Select Rx to monitor the current reception statistics.
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-14 Monitoring the Physical Ports Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 5-13. Ethernet Current Rx Statistics
Table 5-7. Ethernet Current Rx Statistics
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW/RO)
Time Elapsed
(sec)
The elapsed time since the beginning of
the interval
Correct Frames Number of correct frames recorded
Correct Bytes Number of correct bytes recorded
Alignment Error
Frames
Number of recorded frames that had
alignment errors
FCS Error Frames Number of recorded frames that had FCS
errors
Congestion
Dropped Frames
Number of recorded frames that were
dropped due to congestion
4. Select Tx to monitor the current transmission statistics.
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the Physical Ports Performance 5-15
Figure 5-14. Ethernet Current Tx Statistics
Table 5-8. Ethernet Current Tx Statistics
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW/RO)
Time Elapsed (sec) The elapsed time since the beginning of
the interval
Correct Frames Number of correct frames recorded
Correct Bytes Number of correct bytes recorded
Alignment Error Frames Number of recorded frames that had
alignment errors
FCS Error Frames Number of recorded frames that had FCS
errors
Congestion Dropped Frames Number of recorded frames that were
dropped due to congestion
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-16 Monitoring the Physical Ports Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW/RO)
Late Collision Frames Number of recorded frames that had late
collisions
To view the ETHERNET port intervals statistics:
1. From the Statistics Current Rx/Tx Menu select Rx to monitor the reception statistics.
Figure 5-15. Ethernet Intervals Rx Statistics
Table 5-9. Ethernet Intervals Rx Statistics
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW/RO)
Inv. No. Interval number
From (hh:mm) Start time
To (hh:mm) End time
Correct Frames Number of correct frames recorded
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the Physical Ports Performance 5-17
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW/RO)
Correct Bytes Number of correct bytes recorded
Alignment Error
Frames
Number of recorded frames that had
alignment errors
FCS Error Frames Number of recorded frames that had FCS
errors
Congestion
Dropped
Number of recorded frames that were
dropped due to congestion
2. Select Tx to monitor the current transmission statistics.
Figure 5-16. Ethernet Intervals Tx Statistics
Table 5-10. Ethernet Intervals Tx Statistics
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW/RO)
Inv. No. Interval number
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-18 Monitoring the Physical Ports Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW/RO)
From (hh:mm) Start time
To (hh:mm) End time
Correct Frames Number of correct frames recorded
Correct Bytes Number of correct bytes recorded
Single Collision
Frames
Number of recorded frames that had
single collision
Multiple Collision
Frames
Number of recorded frames that had
multiple collisions
Deferred
Transmission
Frames
Number of recorded frames that had
transmission deferred
Displaying the E1/T1 Statistics
Two types of statistical information options are available for the E1/T1 port physical layer. This section describes:
• Viewing the E1/T1 Port Current Statistics
• Viewing the E1/T1 Port Intervals Statistics.
Viewing the E1/T1 Port Current Statistics
To view the E1/T1 port current statistics:
1. In the E1/T1 port’s graphic layers image, click the E1/T1 layer rectangle.
A light blue frame appears around the layer.
Figure 5-17. E1/T1 Port Dialog Box
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the Physical Ports Performance 5-19
2. From the Statistics menu, select Current.
Figure 5-18. E1/T1 Port Current Statistics Dialog Box
Table 5-11. E1/T1 Port Current Statistics Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
Port The port type and number E1/T1 1–16
Mode The port’s current operation mode UNI, CES, IMA Link
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-20 Monitoring the Physical Ports Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
Time elapsed (sec) The elapsed time since the beginning
of the interval
0–899
LOS Loss Of Signal 0 to 2^32-1
LOF Loss of Frame
Not displayed when Line Type =
Unframed
0 to 2^32-1
LCD Loss of Cell Delineation
Does not exist if mode = CES
0 to 2^32-1
RAI Remote Alarm Indication
Not displayed when Line Type =
Unframed
0 to 2^32-1
AIS Alarm Indication Signal 0 to 2^32-1
FEBE Far-end Block Error
Exists only for E1
Not displayed when Line Type =
Unframed
0 to 2^32-1
BES Bursty Errored Seconds
Not displayed when Line Type =
Unframed
0 to 2^32-1
ES Errored Seconds 0 to 2^32-1
SES Severely Errored Seconds 0 to 2^32-1
UAS Unavailable Seconds 0 to 2^32-1
DM Degraded Minutes 0 to 2^32-1
LCV Line Code Violation 0 to 2^32-1
Rx Frame Slips Received Frame Slips 0 to 2^32-1
AR Availability ratio 0–1
• AR is calculated according to: AR = (900 - UAS): 900
• For more detailed information about the meaning of the parameters, refer to the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Installation and Operation Manual.
Viewing the E1/T1 Port Intervals Statistics
To view the E1/T1 port intervals statistics:
1. In the E1/T1 port’s graphic layers image (see Figure 5-17), click the E1/T1 layer rectangle.
A light blue frame appears around the layer.
2. From the Statistics menu, select Intervals.
Note
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the Physical Ports Performance 5-21
Figure 5-19. E1/T1 Port Intervals Statistics
Table 5-12. E1/T1 Port Intervals Statistics
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Port The port type and number E1/T1 1–16
Mode The port’s current operation mode UNI, CES, IMA Link
Number of
Intervals
Number of displayed intervals 0–24
Inv. No. Interval number 1–24
From Time at which the interval began Time entry in the
hh:mm format
To Time at which the interval ended Time entry in the
hh:mm format
LOS Loss of Signal 0 to 2^32-1
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-22 Monitoring the Physical Ports Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
LOF Loss of Frame
Not displayed when Line Type =
Unframed
0 to 2^32-1
LCD Loss of Cell Delineation
Does not exist if mode = CES
0 to 2^32-1
RAI Remote Alarm Indication
Not displayed when Line Type =
Unframed
0 to 2^32-1
AIS Alarm Indication Signal 0 to 2^32-1
FEBE Far-end Block Error
Exists only for E1
Not displayed when Line Type =
Unframed
0 to 2^32-1
BES Bursty Erred Seconds
Not displayed when Line Type =
Unframed
0 to 2^32-1
ES Errored Seconds 0 to 2^32-1
SES Severely Errored Seconds 0 to 2^32-1
UAS Unavailable Seconds 0 to 2^32-1
DM Degraded Minutes 0 to 2^32-1
LCV Line Code Violation 0 to 2^32-1
Rx Frame Slips Received Frame Slips 0 to 2^32-1
AR Availability Ratio.
Calculated by the following formula:
(900-UAS)/UAS
0–1
ESR Errored Seconds Ratio Calculated by the
following formula: ES/(900-UAS)
0–1
SESR Severely Errored Seconds Ratio.
Calculated by the following formula:
SES/(900-UAS)
0–1
For more detailed information about the meaning of the parameters, refer to the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Installation and Operation Manual.
Displaying the ATM-155 Port Statistics
Two types of statistical information options are available for the ATM-155 ports’ physical layer.
Note
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the Physical Ports Performance 5-23
Viewing the ATM-155 Current Statistics
To view the ATM-155 port current statistics:
1. In the ATM-155 port’s graphic layers image, click the SONET/SDH layer rectangle.
A light blue frame appears around the layer.
Figure 5-20. ATM-155 Physical Layer Selected
2. From the Statistics menu, select Current.
Figure 5-21. ATM-155 Port Current Statistics Dialog Box
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-24 Monitoring the Physical Ports Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Table 5-13. ATM-155 Port Current Statistics Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Port The port type and number ATM-155 1–2
Type The port’s frame type SDH
SONET
Time Elapsed (sec) The elapsed time since the
beginning of the interval
0–899
LOS Loss of Signal 0 to2^32-1
Viewing the ATM-155 Intervals Statistics
To view the ATM-155 port intervals statistics:
1. In the ATM-155 port’s graphic layers image (see Figure 5-20), click the SONET/SDH layer rectangle.
A light blue frame appears around the layer.
2. From the Statistics menu, select Intervals.
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the Physical Ports Performance 5-25
Figure 5-22. ATM-155 Port Intervals Statistics Dialog Box
Table 5-14. ATM-155 Port Intervals Statistics Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Port The port type and number ATM-155 1–2
Type The port’s frame type SDH
SONET
Number of
Intervals
Number of recorded intervals 0–24
Inv. No. Interval number 1–24
From Time at which the interval began Time entry in the
hh:mm format
To Time at which the interval ended Time entry in the
hh:mm format
LOS Loss of Signal 0 to 2^32-1
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-26 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
5.4 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance
Displaying the ATM Layer and Port Statistics
Two types of statistical information options are available for the E1/T1 (at UNI mode) and ATM-155 ports’ logical (ATM) layer.
The ATM layer is available for the E1/T1 ports in UNI mode only. For more information about UNI mode, see Configuration Management.
Viewing the ATM Layer Current Statistics
To view the ATM layer current statistics:
1. In the ATM-155 port’s graphic layers image, click the ATM layer rectangle.
A light blue frame appears around the layer.
Figure 5-23. ATM-155 Port – ATM Layer Selected
2. From the Statistics menu, select Current.
The Interface Current Statistics dialog box appears.
Note
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-27
Figure 5-24. ATM Layer Current Statistics Dialog Box
Table 5-15. ATM Layer Current Statistics Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Port The port type and number ATM-155 1–2
Type The port’s current operation mode ATM
Time elapsed
(sec)
The time elapsed since the beginning of the
current interval
0–899
Tx Cells The number of cells transmitted on the port 0 to 2^32-1
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-28 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Rx Cells The number of cells received without HEC
error
0 to 2^32-1
Corrected HEC
Cells
The number of frames received with an
erred HEC, corrected (single error) and
passed on into the device.
Note: This parameter is not displayed for E1/T1 ports.
0 to 2^32-1
Uncorrected HEC
Cells
The number of frames received with an
uncorrected HEC error (two or more errors)
and therefore dropped
0 to 2^32-1
Viewing the ATM Layer Intervals Statistics
To view the ATM layer intervals statistics:
1. In the ATM-155 port’s graphic layers image (see Figure 5-23), click the ATM layer rectangle.
A light blue frame appears around the layer.
2. From the Statistics menu, select Intervals.
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-29
Figure 5-25. ATM Intervals Statistics Dialog Box
Table 5-16. ATM Intervals Statistics Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Port The port type and number ATM-155 1–2
Type The port’s current operation mode ATM
Number of
Intervals
Number of recorded intervals 0–24
Inv. No. Interval number 1–24
From Time at which the interval began Time entry in the
hh:mm format
To Time at which the interval ended Time entry in the
hh:mm format
Tx cells Number of cells transmitted on that port 0 to 2^32-1
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-30 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Rx cells Number of cells received without HEC
error
0 to 2^32-1
Corrected HEC Cells The number of frames received with an
erred HEC, corrected (single error) and
passed on into the device.
Note: This parameter is not displayed for E1/T1 ports.
0 to 2^32-1
Uncorrected HEC
Cells
The number of cells received with an
uncorrected HEC error (two or more
errors) and therefore dropped
Note: This parameter is not displayed for E1/T1 ports.
0 to 2^32-1
Viewing the ATM Interface Current Statistics
The ATM Current Statistics dialog box displays the current statistical information for Tx and Rx cells.
To display the current statistics of an ATM interface:
1. In the IMA Group Statistics dialog box (see Figure 5-28), select an IMA group.
2. In the Current parameters row, select ATM Interface (see Table 5-19), and click <Statistics>.
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-31
Figure 5-26. ATM Current Statistics Dialog Box
Table 5-17. ATM Current Statistics Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
IMA Group The port for which the ATM statistics are
displayed
1–16, corresponding to
the E1/T1 port
Time Elapsed (sec.) The elapsed time since the beginning of
the interval
0–899 (seconds)
TX Cells Number of cells transmitted on that port 0 to 2^32-1
Rx Cells Number of cells received without HEC
error
0 to 2^32-1
Corrected HEC Cells The number of cells received with a
corrected HEC error
Note: This parameter is not displayed for E1/T1 ports.
0 to 2^32-1
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-32 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
Uncorrected HEC
Cells
The number of cells received with an
uncorrected HEC error (two or more
errors) and therefore dropped
Note: This parameter is not displayed for E1/T1 ports.
0 to 2^32-1
The displayed ATM statistics is for the current interval of 15 minutes. You can click <Poll> to immediately poll the agent and update the displayed information.
Viewing the ATM Interface Interval Statistics
The ATM Intervals Statistics dialog box displays information on previous intervals of Tx and Rx cells.
To display the intervals statistics of a group’s ATM interface:
1. In the IMA Group Statistics dialog box (see Figure 5-28), select an IMA group’s row.
2. In the Intervals row, select ATM Interface (see Table 5-19), and click <Statistics>.
Note
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-33
Figure 5-27. ATM Intervals Statistics Dialog Box
Table 5-18. ATM Intervals Statistics Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
IMA Group The port for which the ATM statistics are
displayed
1–16, corresponding to
the E1/T1 port
Number of Intervals Number of intervals 1–24
Inv. No. The interval’s sequential number
From Time at which the interval began hh:mm
To Time at which the interval ended hh:mm
Tx Cells Number of cells transmitted on that port 0 to 2^32-1
Rx Cells Number of cells received without HEC
errors
0 to 2^32-1
Corrected HEC Cells The number of cells received with a
corrected HEC error.
Note: This parameter is not displayed for E1/T1 ports.
0 to 2^32-1
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-34 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
Uncorrected HEC
Cells
The number of cells received with an
uncorrected HEC error (two or more
errors) and therefore dropped
Note: This parameter is not displayed for E1/T1 ports.
0 to 2^32-1
Viewing IMA Group and Link Statistics
The IMA Group Statistics dialog box displays statistical information regarding the currently defined IMA groups, and provides a choice of four statistics display modes:
• IMA group current statistics
• IMA group intervals statistics
• ATM interface current statistics
• ATM interface intervals statistics
In addition, you can display the status details of a selected IMA group (see Viewing an IMA Group's Status).
The IMA Link layer is available only if IMA mode is defined for the E1/T1 port. For more information about IMA mode, see Configuration Management.
To display the details of all IMA groups:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame appears around the device image.
2. From the Statistics menu, select IMA Group.
Note
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-35
Figure 5-28. IMA Group Statistics Dialog Box
Table 5-19. IMA Group Statistics Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW/RO)
Current Number of
Entries
The current number of entries displayed in the
IMA Group Statistics dialog box.
Maximum Number of
Entries
The maximum number of entries that can be
displayed in the IMA Group Statistics dialog box.
Current Two options are available on this row:
• Group – Select this option if you want to
display the IMA group current statistics.
• ATM Interface – Select this option if you
want to display the ATM interface current
statistics.
Click <Statistics> to open a new dialog box for
the selected option.
Group
ATM Interface
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-36 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW/RO)
Intervals Two options are available on this row:
• Group – Select this option if you want to
display the IMA group Intervals statistics.
• ATM Interface - Select this option if you want
to display the ATM interface intervals
statistics.
Click <Statistics> to open a new dialog box for
the selected option.
Group
ATM Interface
Number IMA group sequential number, in
correspondence to a E1/T1 port
1–16
Default: The lowest
available group
number
Min Tx Links Minimum number of Tx links required for the
group to become operational
1–16
Default: 1
Min Rx Links Minimum number of Rx links required for the
group to become operational
1–16
Default: 1
Group ID The IMA group’s ID number 0–255
Default: 0
Tx Frame Length
(cells)
The number of cells included in a frame 32, 64, 128, 256
Max Differential
Delay (msec)
Maximum delay in seconds for determining the
group’s differential
1–100
Blocking Shut down a specific group for any reason other
than insufficient links. Block value is valid only
when group state is active.
Block
Unblock
IMA Version IMA grouping version version number
Common Tx Clock
Source
The IMA group’s clock source type Internal
External
Links in Group Indicates which links (ports) are associated with
the group
1–16
Several values may
appear, separated by
commas and dashes.
For more
information, refer to Viewing IMA Link Status.
The Statistics button is enabled only when an entry with Active state has been selected.
Note
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-37
Viewing an IMA Group's Status
The IMA Group Status dialog box displays the status details of the selected IMA group.
To display an IMA group’s status details:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame appears around the device image.
2. From the Statistics menu, select IMA Group.
The IMA Group Statistics dialog box appears (see Figure 5-28).
3. In the Current row, select Group (see Table 5-19), and click <Statistics>.
The IMA Group Current Statistics dialog box appears (see Figure 5-30).
4. From the IMA Group Current Statistics dialog box, click <Status>.
The IMA Group Status dialog box appears.
Figure 5-29. IMA Group Status Dialog Box
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-38 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Table 5-20. IMA Group Status Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Group IMA group number 1–16
Ne/Fe Current
State
The near-end (NE) and far-end (FE) current state.
Not configured – The group does not exist Not Configured
Start-up – The group is waiting for near-end or far-
end startup
Start-up
Start-up-Ack – Transitional state, when both
groups start-up to insufficient-links state
Start-up-Ack
Config-Aborted (M) – The group has rejected the
far-end frame length configuration parameter
because of unsupported frame length
Config-Aborted (M)
Config-Aborted (Symmetry) – The group has
rejected the far-end symmetric mode configuration
parameter because of incompatible group
symmetry
Config-Aborted
(Symmetry)
Config-Aborted (Other) – The group has rejected
the far-end configuration parameters for another
reason
Config-Aborted (Other)
Insufficient Links – There is an insufficient number
of links to allow group activation
Insufficient Links
Blocked – Group operation has been blocked Blocked
Operational – The group has sufficient links (in
both directions) to operate and carry ATM layer
cells
Operational
Config-Aborted (Version) – The group has rejected
the far-end IMA version configuration parameter,
because of unsupported IMA version
Config-Aborted (Version)
Ne/Fe Tx Clk
Mode
Transmission clocking mode used by the near-end
and far-end IMA group
CTC
ITC
Tx/Rx IMA ID IMA group ID 0–255
Tx/Rx Frame
Length (Cells)
Frame length, in the transmit and receive direction,
used by the IMA group
32, 64, 128, 256
Tx/Rx Timing Ref
Link
The link index of the transmission or the receiving
timing-reference link used by the near-end or far-
end for IMA data-cell clock recovery to or from the
ATM layer
A value of 0 indicates that the link has not been
defined
0–16
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-39
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Tx/Rx Available
Cell Rate
(Cells/sec)
The current cell rate in cells per second that is
provided by the group in the transmission or the
receiving direction in relation to all transmission or
receiving active links
Tx/Rx Configured
Links
The number of defined transmit or receive group
links
0–16
Tx/Rx Active
Links
Number of currently active transmit or receive links 0–16
Failure Status Types of failure status:
No failure – The IMA group is operational No Failure
Start-up Near-End – The near-end is in startup Start-up Near-End
Start-up-Far-End – The far-end is in startup Start-up Far-End
Invalid M value near-end – The near-end does not
support the far-end Frame Length value
Invalid M Value Near-End
Invalid M value far-end – The far-end does not
support the near-end Frame Length value
Invalid M Value Far-End
Symmetric Near-End – The near-end does not
support the far-end group symmetry
Symmetric Near-End
Asymmetric Far-End – The far-end does not
support the near-end group symmetry
Asymmetric Far-End
Insufficient links Near-End – Less than the
minimum number of defined Tx or Rx links are
active for group operation in the near-end
Insufficient Links Near-
End
Blocked NE and Blocked FE – The near-end or the
far-end is blocked
Blocked NE and Blocked
FE
Insufficient Links Far-End – Less than the minimum
number of defined Tx or Rx links are active for
group operation in the far-end
Insufficient Links Far-End
Blocked Near-End – Group near-end operation has
been blocked
Blocked Links Near-End
Blocked links Far-End – Group far-end operation
has been blocked
Blocked Links Far-End
Other –Other failure status messages, depending
on the specific system implementation (for
example, group timing mode mismatch)
Other
Invalid IMA version near-end – Far-end
unsupported IMA version
Invalid IMA Version
Near-End
Invalid IMA version far-end – Far-end unsupported
IMA version
Invalid IMA Version
Far-End
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-40 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Last Change Time of the last status change detected in the IMA
group
Format:YYYY-MM-DD,
hh:mm:ss
Running Time
(sec)
Time (in seconds) that the IMA group has been in
the operational test
0–4*10^9
Least Delay Link Link index of the defined link with the smallest
delay.
0 indicates that the link has not been defined or
that the link with the smallest delay has not yet
been determined.
0–16
Max Observed
Differential Delay
(msec)
Most recently observed maximum difference
between the smallest and longest propagation
delay
0–4*10^9
Viewing an IMA Group's Current Statistics
You can view the current statistics of the selected IMA group. This includes information on the group’s UAS, near-end, and far-end failures.
To view the current statistics of an IMA group:
1. In the IMA Group Statistics dialog box (see Figure 5-28), select an IMA group’s row.
2. In the Current row, select Group (see Table 5-19), and click <Statistics>.
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-41
Figure 5-30. IMA Group Current Statistics Dialog Box
Table 5-21. IMA Group Current Statistics Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW)
IMA Group The IMA group for which the statistics
appears
1–16 in
correspondence to the
E1/T1 port
Time Elapsed (sec) The elapsed time since the beginning
of the interval
0–899
UAS Unavailable seconds:
The number of one-second intervals in
which the IMA group traffic state
machine is down.
0 to 2^32-1
Near-End Failures Near-end failures:
The number of times a near-end group
failure occurs in the current interval.
0 to 2^32-1
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-42 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW)
Far-End Failures Far-end failures:
The number of times a far-end group
failure occurs in the current interval
0 to 2^32-1
• Click <Poll> to immediately poll the agent and update the displayed information.
• Click <Status> to open the IMA Group Status dialog box (see Viewing an IMA Group's Status).
Viewing an IMA Group's Intervals Statistics
The IMA Group Intervals Statistics dialog box displays statistical information on the previously performed polling interval, and allows you to check for any UAS and near-end or far-end failures.
To display the intervals statistics of an IMA group:
1. In the IMA Group Statistics dialog box (see Figure 5-28), select an IMA group’s row.
2. In the Intervals row, select Group (see Table 5-19), and click <Statistics>.
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-43
Figure 5-31. IMA Group Intervals Statistics Dialog Box
Table 5-22. IMA Group Intervals Statistics Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
IMA Group The IMA group for which the statistics
are displayed
1–16 in
correspondence to the
E1/T1 port
Number of Intervals Number of intervals 0–24
Inv. No. The current interval number 1–24
From Time at which the interval began hh:mm
To Time at which the interval ended hh:mm
UAS Unavailable seconds:
The number of one-second intervals in
which the IMA group traffic state
machine is down.
0 to 2^32-1
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-44 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
Near-End Failures Near-end failures:
The number of times a near end group
failure occurs in the current interval.
0 to 2^32-1
Far-End Failures Far-end failures:
The number of times a far-end group
failure occurs in the current interval.
0 to 2^32-1
To display the status details of a specific interval:
• Select the interval’s row and click <Status>.
The Status button is enabled only when an interval is selected.
Viewing the IMA Link Current Statistics
To view the IMA link current statistics:
1. In the E1/T1 port’s graphic layers image, click the IMA Link layer rectangle.
A light blue frame appears around the layer.
Figure 5-32. E1/T1 Port – IMA Link Layer Available
2. From the Statistics menu, select Current.
Note
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-45
Figure 5-33. IMA Link Current Statistics Dialog Box
Table 5-23. IMA Link Current Statistics
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Port Port type and number 1–16
Mode The port’s operating mode IMA Link
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-46 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
IMA Group Link association with an IMA Group 1–16
Not in Group
Time Elapsed (sec) Seconds elapsed since the beginning of
the current interval
0–899
Violation The number of ICP cells that are in error,
invalid or missing, excluding seconds
during which a SES or UAS-IMA condition
was reported.
0 to 2^32-1
Out of IMA Frame IMA Link current OIF anomalies (Near-end
and far-end)
0 to 2^32-1
SES IMA Link current severely errored seconds
(Near-end and far-end)
0 to 2^32-1
UAS IMA Link current unavailable seconds
(Near-end and far-end).
Status of unavailable is initiated when
there are 10 consecutive SES occurrences.
The status ends after 10 consecutive
seconds with no SES occurrences.
0 to 2^32-1
Tx UUS IMA Link current Tx unusable seconds
(Near-end and far-end)
0 to 2^32-1
Rx UUS IMA Link current Rx unusable seconds
(Near-end and far-end)
0 to 2^32-1
Tx Fail Number of IMA Link Tx failures (Near-end
and far-end)
0 to 2^32-1
Rx Fail Number of IMA Link Rx failures (Near-end
and far-end)
0 to 2^32-1
Viewing the IMA Link Intervals Statistics
To view the IMA link intervals statistics:
1. In the E1/T1 port’s graphic layers image (see Figure 5-32), click the IMA Link layer rectangle.
A light blue frame appears around the layer.
2. From the Statistics menu, select Intervals.
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-47
Figure 5-34. IMA Link Intervals Statistics Dialog Box
Table 5-24. IMA Link Intervals Statistics Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
Port Port type and number 1–16
Mode Operating mode IMA Link
IMA Group Link association with an IMA Group 1–16
Not in Group
Number of
Intervals
Number of IMA Valid Link Intervals displayed 0–24
Inv. No. Interval number 1–24
From Time at which the interval began hh:mm
To Time at which the interval ended hh:mm
Violation The number of ICP cells that are in error, invalid or
missing, excluding seconds during which a SES or UAS-IMA
condition was reported
0 to 2^32-1
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-48 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
Out of IMA Frame IMA Link current OIF anomalies (Near-end and far-end) 0 to 2^32-1
NE SES Number of one-second intervals containing one of the
following at the near end:
• More than 30% of ICP cells are IV-IMA (invalid IMA)
• One or more of the following link errors: LOS,
OOF/LOF, AIS, LCD
• LIF (Loss of IMA Frame) error
LODS (Link Out of Delay Synchronization) error
0 to 2^32-1
NE UAS IMA Link current unavailable seconds (Near-end and far-
end)
0 to 2^32-1
NE Tx UUS IMA Link current Tx unusable seconds (Near-end and far-
end)
0 to 2^32-1
NE Rx UUS IMA Link current Rx unusable seconds (Near-end and far-
end)
0 to 2^32-1
NE Rx Fail Number of IMA Link Rx failures (Near-end and far-end) 0 to 2^32-1
FE SES The number of one-second intervals containing one or
more RDI IMA errors (except during UAS IMA at the far
end)
0 to 2^32-1
FE UAS The number of unavailable seconds (UAS) at the Far End.
A status of unavailable is initiated when there are 10
consecutive IMA Far End SES occurrences; the status ends
when there are 10 consecutive seconds with no IMA far
end SES occurrences.
0 to 2^32-1
FE Tx The number of unusable seconds at the far end
transmission LSM
0 to 2^32-1
FE Rx The number of unusable seconds at the near end receiving
LSM
0 to 2^32-1
FE Tx Fail The number of occurrences of a far end transmission
failure causing an alarm condition on this link
0 to 2^32-1
FE Rx Fail The number of occurrences of a near end receiving failure
causing an alarm condition on this link
0 to 2^32-1
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-49
Viewing ATM XC Statistics
The ATM Cross Connection Statistics dialog box displays statistical information on the currently defined ATM XCs, and provides a choice of six statistics display modes:
• User current statistics
• User intervals statistics
• OAM current statistics
• OAM intervals statistics
• OAM Loopback current statistics
• OAM Loopback intervals statistics.
In addition, you can search for VC entries and focus the view on endpoint 1 or endpoint 2.
To display the currently defined ATM XCs:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame appears around the device image.
2. From the Statistics menu, select XC>ATM.
Figure 5-35. ATM Cross Connection Statistics Dialog Box
Table 5-25. ATM XC Statistics Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
Current Number of
Entries
Number of currently defined cross-connections 0–128
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-50 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
Maximum Number of
Entries
Maximum number of possible XCs connections 128
Current
Three options are available on this row:
• User – Select this option to display the VC user
current statistics
• OAM – Select this option to display the VC OAM
current statistics
• OAM Loopback – Select this option to display the
VS OAM Loopback current statistics
Click <EP1> or <EP2> to open a new dialog box for
the selected option.
User
OAM
OAM Loopback
Intervals
Three options are available on this row:
• User – Select this option to display the VC user
intervals statistics
• OAM – Select this option to display the VC OAM
intervals statistics
• OAM Loopback – Select this option to display the
VS OAM Loopback intervals statistics
Click <EP1> or <EP2> to open a new dialog box for
the selected option.
User
OAM
OAM Loopback
XC ID Unique ID string for the XC Up to 9
alphanumeric
characters,
case-sensitive
EP-1 Port The channel’s port type and mode E1/T1 1–16
IMA Group 1–16
ATM-155 1–2
EP-1 VPI The channel’s VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) 0–255
EP-1 VCI The channel’s VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) 32–65535
EP-2 Port The channel’s port E1/T1 1–16
IMA Group 1–16
ATM-155 1–2
EP-2 VPI Same as for EP1 VPI Same as for EP1 VPI
EP-2 VCI Same as for EP1 VCI Same as for EP1 VCI
Type The connection type VP
VC
• You can click <Next> to display the next XC entries, if available.
• To search for an XC entry, click <Search>.
Note
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-51
Viewing the ATM User Current Statistics
The CES Current Statistics dialog box displays information on Rx, Tx, and discarded cells. You can display user or OAM information, according to your selection.
To view the ATM User current statistics:
1. In the CES Cross Connection Statistics dialog box (see Figure 5-44), select the XC for which you want to display the current statistics.
2. In the Current row select User.
3. Click <ATM Statistics…> to display the ATM User Current Statistics dialog box.
Figure 5-36. ATM User Current Statistics
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-52 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Table 5-26. ATM User Current Statistics
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Port Port type and number of the selected XC ATM-155: 1-2 (3 if
APS active)
IMA-Group: 1-4, 8, 16,
32, 63
VPI The channel VPI 0–255 (UNI)
0–4095 (NNI)
VCI The channel VCI 32–65535
Time Elapsed
(sec)
The elapsed time since the beginning of
the interval
0–899
Rx Cells CLP (1+0): Total number of received cells
CLP (0): Total number of received cells
with CLP = 0
0 to 2^32-1
Tx Cells CLP (1+0): Total number of transmitted
cells
CLP (0): Total number of transmitted cells
with CLP = 0
0 to 2^32-1
Discarded Cells CLP (1+0): Total number of discarded cells
CLP (0): Total number of discarded cells
with CLP = 0
0 to 2^32-1
Viewing the ATM User Intervals Statistics
The ATM User Intervals Statistics dialog box displays information on Rx, Tx, and discarded cells. You can display user or OAM information, according to your selection.
To view the ATM user intervals statistics:
1. In the CES XC Statistics dialog box, select the XC for which you want to display the intervals statistics.
2. In the Intervals row, select User.
3. Click <ATM User…> to display the ATM user statistics.
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-53
Figure 5-37. ATM User Intervals Statistics Dialog Box
Table 5-27. ATM User Intervals Statistics Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
Port Port of the selected XC ATM-155: 1-2 (3 if
APS active)
IMA-Group: 1-4, 8,
16, 32, 63
VPI VPI of the selected XC 0–255 UNI
0–4095 NNI
VCI VPI of the selected XC 32–65535
Number of Intervals Number of displayed intervals 0 – 24 if 24 or less
intervals exist
0 otherwise
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-54 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
Inv. No. Interval number 1–24
From Time at which the interval began hh:mm
To Time at which the interval ended hh:mm
Rx Cells CLP (1+0): Total number of received cells
CLP (0): Total number of received cells
with CLP = 0
0 to 2^32-1
Tx Cells CLP (1+0): Total number of transmitted
cells
CLP (0): Total number of transmitted
cells with CLP = 0
0 to 2^32-1
Discarded Cells CLP (1+0): Total number of discarded
cells
CLP (0): Total number of discarded cells
with CLP = 0
0 to 2^32-1
Viewing the VC User Current Statistics
The VC User Current Statistics dialog box displays information on Rx, Tx, and discarded cells. The information appears for endpoint 1 or endpoint 2, according to your selection.
To view the VC user current statistics:
1. In the ATM Cross Connection Statistics dialog box (see Figure 5-35), select the VC for which you want to display the current statistics.
2. On the Current row (see Table 5-25), select User.
3. Click <EP1> to display the statistics endpoint 1, or <EP2> to display the statistics for endpoint 2.
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-55
Figure 5-38. VP/VC User Current Statistics
Table 5-28. VP/VC User Current Statistics
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Port EP-X port in the selected XC E1/T1 1–16
IMA Group 1-N
ATM-155 1-2
VPI EP-X VPI in the selected XC 0–255
VCI EP-X VCI in the selected XC
Displayed only for VC XC
32–65535
Time Elapsed
(sec)
The elapsed time since the beginning of
the interval
0–899
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-56 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Rx Cells CLP (1+0): Total number of received cells
CLP (0): Total number of received cells
with CLP = 0
0 to 2^32-1
Tx Cells CLP (1+0): Total number of transmitted
cells
CLP (0): Total number of transmitted cells
with CLP = 0
0 to 2^32-1
Discarded Cells CLP (1+0): Total number of discarded cells
CLP (0): Total number of discarded cells
with CLP = 0
0 to 2^32-1
Viewing the VC User Intervals Statistics
The VC User Intervals Statistics dialog box displays information on Rx, Tx, and discarded cells. The information appears for endpoint 1 or endpoint 2, according to your selection.
To view the VC user intervals statistics:
1. In the ATM XC Statistics dialog box (see Figure 5-35), select the VC for which you want to display the VC user intervals statistics.
2. In the Intervals row (see Table 5-25), select User.
3. Click <EP1> to display the statistics for endpoint 1, or <EP2> to display the statistics for endpoint 2.
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-57
Figure 5-39. VC User Intervals Statistics Dialog Box
Table 5-29. VC User Intervals Statistics Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
Port EP-X port of the selected XC E1/T1 1–16
IMA Group 1-N
ATM-155 1-2
VPI EP-X VPI of the selected XC 0–255
VCI EP-X VPI of the selected XC
Displayed only for VC XC
32–65535
Number of Intervals Number of displayed intervals 0–24
Inv. No. Interval number 1–24
From Time at which the interval began hh:mm
To Time at which the interval ended hh:mm
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-58 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
Rx Cells (CLP 1+0) Total number of received cells during the
interval
0 to 2^32-1
Rx Cells (CLP 0) Total number of received cells with
CLP=0 during the interval
0 to 2^32-1
Tx Cells (CLP 1+0) Total number of transmitted cells during
the interval
0 to 2^32-1
Tx Cells (CLP 0) Total number of transmitted cells with
CLP=0 during the interval
0 to 2^32-1
Discarded Cells (CLP
1+0)
Total number of discarded cells 0 to 2^32-1
Discarded Cells
(CLP 0)
Total number of discarded cells with CLP 0 to 2^32-1
Viewing the VC OAM Current Statistics
The VC OAM Current Statistics dialog box displays information on the OAM cells current statistics. The information appears for endpoint 1 or endpoint 2, according to your selection.
To view the VC OAM current statistics:
1. In the ATM XC Statistics dialog box (see Figure 5-35), select the VC for which you want to display the current statistics.
2. In the Current row (see Table 5-25), select OAM.
3. Click <EP1> to display the statistics for endpoint 1, or <EP2> to display the statistics for endpoint 2.
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-59
Figure 5-40. VC OAM Current Statistics Dialog Box
Table 5-30. VC OAM Current Statistics Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
Port EP-X port of the selected XC E1/T1 1–16
IMA Group 1–N
ATM-155 1–2
VPI EP-X VPI of the selected XC 0–255
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-60 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
VCI EP-X VCI of the selected XC.
Displayed only for VC XC.
32–65535
Time elapsed The elapsed time since the beginning of
the interval
0–899
Rx AIS Time in seconds during which AIS cells
were received
0–2^32-1
Rx RDI Time in seconds during which RDI cells
were received
0–2^32-1
Tx RDI Time in seconds during which RDI cells
were transmitted
0–2^32-1
LOC The time, in seconds, during which Loss of
Continuity state was declared (valid only
when CC is activated)
0–2^32-1
FM SES FM SES (Fault Management Severely Erred
Seconds): the time, in seconds, during
which AIS cells were received, or LOC state
was declared
0–2^32-1
FM UAS FM UAS (Fault Management Unavailable
Seconds): the time, in seconds, between
10 consecutive SESs and 10 consecutive
seconds without SES.
0–2^32-1
Viewing the VC OAM Intervals Statistics
The VC OAM Intervals Statistics dialog box displays information on the OAM cells intervals statistics. The information appears for endpoint 1 or endpoint 2, according to your selection.
To view the VC OAM intervals statistics:
1. In the ATM XC Statistics dialog box (see Figure 5-35), select the VC for which you want to display the intervals statistics.
2. In the Intervals row (see Table 5-25), select OAM.
3. Click <EP1> to display the statistics for endpoint 1, or <EP2> to display the statistics for endpoint 2.
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-61
Figure 5-41. VC OAM Intervals Statistics
Table 5-31. VC OAM Intervals Statistics Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
Port EP-X port of the selected XC E1/T1 1–16
IMA Group 1-N
ATM-155 1–2
VPI EP-X VPI of the selected XC 0–255
VCI EP-X VCI of the selected XC
Displayed only for VC XC
32–65535
Number of Intervals The number of intervals displayed 0–24
Inv. No. Interval number 1–24
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-62 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
From Time at which the interval began Time entry in the
hh:mm format
To Time at which the interval ended Time entry in the
hh:mm format
Rx AIS Time in seconds during which AIS cells
were received
0 to 2^32-1
Rx RDI Time in seconds during which RDI cells
were received
0 to 2^32-1
Tx RDI Time in seconds during which RDI cells
were transmitted
0 to 2^32-1
LOC Time in seconds during which Loss of
Continuity state was declared (valid
only when CC is activated)
0 to 2^32-1
FM SES FM SES (Fault Management Severely
Erred Seconds): The time in seconds
during which AIS cells were received, or
LOC state was declared
0–2^32-1
FM UAS FM UAS (Fault Management Unavailable
Seconds): Activated as a result of 10
consecutive FM SES’s, and deactivated
as a result of 10 consecutive seconds
without FM SES
0–2^32-1
Viewing the VC OAM Loopback Current Statistics
The VC OAM Loopback Current Statistics dialog box displays information on the OAM loopback cells current statistics. The information appears for endpoint 1 or endpoint 2, according to your selection.
To view the VC OAM Loopback current statistics:
1. In the ATM XC Statistics dialog box (see Figure 5-35), select the VC for which you want to display the current statistics.
2. In the Current row (see Table 5-25), select OAM Loopback.
3. Click <EP1> to display the statistics for endpoint 1, or <EP2> to display the statistics for endpoint 2.
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-63
Figure 5-42. VC OAM Loopback Current Statistics Dialog Box
Table 5-32. VC OAM Loopback Current Statistics Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
(RO)
Port EP-X port of the selected XC E1/T1 1–16
IMA Group 1–N
ATM-155 1–2
VPI EP-X VPI of the selected XC 0–255
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-64 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
(RO)
VCI EP-X VCI of the selected XC.
Displayed only for VC XC.
32–65535
Time Elapsed The elapsed time since the beginning of
the interval
0–899
Average Delay
(μsec)
The average round trip delay of the
connection
Number
Maximum Delay
(μsec)
The maximum round trip delay of the
connection
Number
Minimum Delay
(μsec)
The minimum round trip delay of the
connection
Number
CDV (μsec) The cell delay variation measured for the
connection. This parameter is calculated as
the standard deviation of the delay
measurements.
Number
Errored Sessions Number of failed loopback sessions
A loopback session in which a cell is not
received within 5 seconds is considered to
have failed.
Number
Viewing the VC OAM Loopback Intervals Statistics
The VC OAM Loopback Intervals Statistics dialog box displays information on the OAM loopback cells interval statistics. The information appears for endpoint 1 or endpoint 2, according to your selection.
To view the VC OAM Loopback intervals statistics:
1. In the ATM XC Statistics dialog box (see Figure 5-35), select the VC for which you want to display the intervals statistics.
2. In the Intervals row (see Table 5-25), select OAM Loopback.
3. Click <EP1> to display the statistics of endpoint 1, or <EP2> to display the statistics of endpoint 2.
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-65
Figure 5-43. VC OAM Loopback Intervals Statistics
Table 5-33. VC OAM Loopback Intervals Statistics Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
(RO)
Port EP-X port of the selected XC E1/T1 1–16
VPI EP-X VPI of the selected XC 0–255
VCI EP-X VCI of the selected XC
Displayed only for VC XC
32–65535
Number of Intervals The number of intervals elapsed since
the beginning of the session
1–24
Inv. No. The interval number 0 – 24 if 24 or less
intervals exist
0 otherwise
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-66 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
(RO)
From The start time of the connection hh:mm
To The end time of the connection hh:mm
Average Delay (μsec) The average round trip delay of the
connection
Number
Maximum Delay (μsec) The maximum round trip delay of the
connection
Number
Minimum Delay (μsec) The minimum round trip delay of the
connection
Number
CDV (μsec) The cell delay variation measured for
the connection. This parameter
calculated as the standard deviation of
the delay measurements.
Number
Errored Sessions The number of failed loopback sessions
A loopback session in which a cell is
not received within 5 seconds is
considered to have failed.
Number
Viewing CES XC Statistics
The CES Cross Connection Statistics dialog box displays statistical information on the currently defined CES XCs, and provides a choice of four statistics display modes:
• ATM User current statistics
• ATM User intervals statistics
• CES User current statistics
• CES User intervals statistics
To display the currently defined CES XCs:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame appears around the device image.
2. From the main menu, select Statistics.
3. From the Statistics menu, select XC > CES.
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-67
Figure 5-44. CES Cross Connection Statistics Dialog Box
Table 5-34. CES XC Statistics Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
Current Number of
Entries
The current number of CES cross
connections in the table.
Maximum Number of
Entries
The maximum number of CES cross
connections that can be defined.
Current Two options are available in this row:
• User – Select this option to display
the user current statistics.
• OAM – Select this option to display
the OAM current statistics.
• OAM Loopback – Select this option to
display the OAM loopback current
statistics
User
OAM
OAM Loopback
Intervals Two options are available on this row:
• User – Select this option to display
the user current statistics.
• OAM – Select this option to display
the OAM current statistics.
• OAM Loopback – Select this option to
display the OAM loopback current
statistics
User
OAM
OAM Loopback
XC ID Unique string that identifies the XC
Up to 9
alphanumeric
characters, case-
sensitive
Default: blank
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-68 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
ATM Port The endpoint’s (1) port type and mode E1/T1 1–16
IMA Group 1–16
ATM-155 1, 2
ATM VPI The endpoint’s (1) VPI.
The VP/VC XC configuration should
comply with the following rules:
• Two VP XCs with the same VPI on the
same port cannot be configured.
• Two VC XCs with the same VPI/VCI on
the same port cannot be configured.
• VPI/VCI cannot be changed on-the-fly
(dynamically).
0–255
ATM VCI The endpoint’s (1) VCI for VC XC.
The field is disabled when
XC Type = “VP”.
The VC XC configuration should comply
with the same rules defined above for
the EP-1 VPI.
32–65535
Default: 32
CES Port Port type and mode of endpoint 2 E1/T1 1–16
IMA Group 1–16
ATM-155 1, 2
Time Slots The CES bundle time slots 1-32 for E1
1–24 for T1
• Click <CES Statistics> to open the dialog box corresponding to the selected items. <CES Statistics> is disabled when no entry is selected, or when User is not selected.
• Click <ATM Statistics> to open the dialog box corresponding to the selected items. <ATM Statistics> is disabled when no entry is selected.
• Selecting OAM or OAM Loopback and clicking <ATM Statistics> opens the same dialog box as selecting OAM or OAM Loopback from the ATM XC Statistics dialog box.
Viewing the CES User Current Statistics
The CES Current Statistics dialog box displays information on Rx, Tx, and discarded cells. You can display user or OAM information, according to your selection.
To view the CES user current statistics:
1. In the CES XC Statistics dialog box (see Figure 5-44), select the XC for which you want to display the current statistics.
2. In the Current row, select User.
Note
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-69
3. Click <CES Statistics> to display the CES user statistics.
Figure 5-45. CES User Current Statistics Dialog Box
Table 5-35. CES User Current Statistics
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Port Port type and number of the selected XC ATM-155 1–2
E1 1–16
T1 1–16
IMA Group
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-70 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
VPI The VPI of the selected XC 0–255 UNI
0–4095 NNI
VCI The VCI of the selected XC 32–65535
Time Elapsed
(sec)
The elapsed time since the beginning of
the interval
0–899
Sequence Errors Number of times that an incoming AAL1
Type 1 SAR-PDU is out of sequence
Number
CES Header
Errors
Number of AAL1 header errors detected,
including those corrected
Number
Buffer Underflow Number of times CDVT buffer was in
underflow state
Number
Buffer Overflow Number of times CDVT buffer was in
overflow state
Number
Pointer Mismatch Number of times pointer mismatch was
found.
Structured CES only.
Number
Viewing the CES User Intervals Statistics
The CES User Intervals Statistics dialog box displays information on Rx, Tx, and discarded cells. You can display user or OAM information, according to your selection.
To view the CES user intervals statistics:
1. In the CES XC Statistics dialog box (see Figure 5-44), select the XC for which you want to display the intervals statistics.
2. In the Intervals row, select User.
3. Click <CES Statistics> to display the CES user intervals statistics.
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the ATM Layer Performance 5-71
Figure 5-46. CES User Intervals Statistics Dialog Box
Table 5-36. CES User Intervals Statistics Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Port Port of the selected XC ATM-155: 1–2
E1 1–16
T1 1–16
IMA-Group: 1–16
VPI The VPI of the selected XC 0–255 UNI
0–4095 NNI
VCI The VCI of the selected XC 32-65535
Number of Intervals Number of displayed intervals 0–24 if 24 or less
intervals exist
0 otherwise
Inv. No. Interval number 1–24
From Time at which the interval began hh:mm
To Time at which the interval ended hh:mm
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-72 Monitoring the PPPoE Sessions Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Sequence Errors Number of times that an incoming AAL1
Type 1 SAR-PDU is out of sequence
Number
CES Header Errors Number of AAL1 header errors detected,
including those corrected
Number
Buffer Underflow Number of times CDVT buffer was in
underflow state
Number
Buffer Overflow Number of times CDVT buffer was in
overflow state
Number
Pointer Mismatch Number of times pointer mismatch was
found.
Structured CES only
Number
5.5 Monitoring the PPPoE Sessions Performance
PPPoE sessions let you retrieve IP addresses of all data, voice and management sources to allow HSPDA connectivity in a variety of DSL-based cellular backhaul applications.
To access the PPPoE table:
• From the Configuration menu, select PPPoE.
The PPPoE table is displayed.
Figure 5-47. PPPoE Table
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the PPPoE Sessions Performance 5-73
Table 5-37. PPPoE Table
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
ID The identifying number of the PPPoE
logical entity
1–4
Scheuled Restart
Mode
Enable or disable the scheduled restart
mechanism for this PPPoE entity.
When enabled, the PPPoE session is
restarted locally at around the time
specified below.
Enabled
Disabled
Default: Disabled
User Name The user name to be used in the PPP
session. The authentication mechanism
(PAP, CHAP or none) is determined by
the PPP server.
Up to 32 characters,
case-sensitive
Default: NULL
Bound To ID of the interface or port to which the
PPPoE protocol is bound
Displaying PPPoE Connection Status
To view the PPPoE status:
• From the PPPoE table, click Status.
The PPPoE Status dialog is displayed.
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-74 Monitoring the PPPoE Sessions Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 5-48. PPPoE Status
Table 5-38. PPPoE Status
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
ID The identifying number of the PPPoE
logical entity
1–4
Session Status Indicates whether the PPPoE session is
currently up or down
Up
Down
Session ID ID number that was assigned to the
PPPoE session by the access
concentrator
Numerical
Local MAC Address MAC address of the local device XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX
(hexadecimal)
Remote MAC
Address
MAC address of the access concentrator
with which the PPPoE session is
established
XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX
(hexadecimal)
Actual Scheduled
Restart Time
The actual time in which the scheduled
restart is to take place. The actual time is
the sum of the previously set start time
and random number.
00:00:00 – 23:59:59
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the PPPoE Sessions Performance 5-75
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Actual Back-off
Delay (sec)
The actual delay in seconds, before every
PPPoE initialization process (not including
a scheduled restart). The first PPPoE
packet is not sent this delay expires.
Number of seconds
PPP LCP Status Indicates whether the LCP of the PPP
session is currently up or down
Up
Down
PPP IPCP Status Indicates whether the IPCP of the PPP
session is currently up or down
Up
Down
Authentication
Status
The authentication method used for
the PPP session
PAP
CHAP
None
Local IP Address IP address that was allocated to
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 by IPCP
Any valid IP address
Remote MRU Value of the remote MRU (maximum
receive unit)
Numerical
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-76 Monitoring the Multiservice over PSN Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
5.6 Monitoring the Multiservice over PSN Performance
ACE-3105, ACE-3205 is equipped with an Ethernet interface for ATM/TDM over PSN traffic concentration. Ethernet tunneling parameters are configured via the Multiservice over PSN menu.
To view the Multiservice over PSN status:
1. From the Statistics menu, click Multiservice over PSN.
The Multiservice over PSN menu is displayed.
Figure 4-49. Multi Service over PSN Menu
2. Select ATM (or TDM as needed).
The ATM (or TDM) PW Statistics Table is displayed.
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the Multiservice over PSN Performance 5-77
Figure 4-50. ATM Pseudowire Statistics Table
Table 4-39. ATM Pseudowire Statistics
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
PW Number Number of the Pseudowire connection that is
associated with the recovered clock ID.
1 to Maximum Number of
Entries
PW Name Name of the Pseudowire connection Alphanumeric
PW Type Type of the pseudowire connection ATM VP 1 to 1
ATM VC 1 to 1
ATM VP N to 1
ATM VC N to 1
AAL5-SDU
SAToP
Basic CES PSN
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-78 Monitoring the Multiservice over PSN Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
PSN Type The type of packet-switched network on which
this PW is established.
MPLS
UDP over IP
MPLS over IP
MPLS over GRE
Default:MPLS over IP
Peer Number of an existing PSN peer device to which
the current PW is assigned. The PW terminates
on this peer.
1–32
Out PW Label The PW label that is used in the outbound
direction. Relevant only if the PW subtype is
clock recovery and if the provisioning mode is
set to Manual.
1–4095 if the PSN type is
UDPoIP
16–1048575 for any other
PSN type
In PW Label The PW label that is used in the inbound
direction.
Displaying Pseudowire Connection Status
The pseudowire connection status includes the PW type, its operational status and its labels.
To view the pseudowire connection status:
1. From the Configuration menu, select Multiservice over PSN.
2. Select PW.
The status details of a PW connection are displayed.
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the Multiservice over PSN Performance 5-79
Figure 4-51. Pseudowire Table
Table 4-40. Pseudowire Table
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
PW Number Number of the Pseudowire connection that is
associated with the recovered clock ID.
1 to Maximum Number of
Entries
PW Name Name of the Pseudowire connection Alphanumeric
PW Type Type of the pseudowire connection ATM VP 1 to 1
ATM VC 1 to 1
ATM VP N to 1
ATM VC N to 1
AAL5-SDU
SAToP
Basic CES PSN
PSN Type The type of packet-switched network on
which this PW is established.
MPLS
UDP over IP
MPLS over IP
MPLS over GRE
Default:MPLS over IP
Peer Number of an existing PSN peer device
to which the current PW is assigned. The PW
terminates on this peer.
1-32
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-80 Monitoring the Multiservice over PSN Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Out PW Label The PW label that is used in the outbound
direction. Relevant only if the PW subtype is
clock recovery and if the provisioning mode is
set to Manual.
1–4095 if the PSN type is
UDPoIP
16–1048575 for any other
PSN type
In PW Label The PW label that is used in the inbound
direction.
3. Select the entry in the table and click <Status>.
The PW Status dialog box is displayed.
Figure 4-52. Pseudowire Connection Status
Table 4-41. Pseudowire Connection Status
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
PW Number Number of the associated Pseudowire
connection.
1 to Maximum Number of
Entries
PW Name Name of the Pseudowire connection Alphanumeric
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the Multiservice over PSN Performance 5-81
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
PW Type Type of the pseudowire connection ATM VP 1 to 1
ATM VC 1 to 1
ATM VP N to 1
ATM VC N to 1
AAL5-SDU
SAToP
Basic CES PSN
PSN Type The type of packet-switched network
on which this PW is established.
MPLS
UDP over IP
MPLS over IP
MPLS over GRE
Default:MPLS over IP
Operational
Status
Indicates the current status of the
PW connection:
• Up – the connection is up and
running
• Down – the connection is down
• Not present – a configuration is
missing
• Lower layer down – the underlying
layer (MAC, tunnel) is down
Up
Down
Not present
Lower layer down
Local Status Forwarding
Not Forwarding Fault
Attachment Circuit Rx Fault
Attachment Circuit Tx Fault
PSN Rx Fault
PSN Tx Fault
Remote Status Forwarding
Not Forwarding Fault
Attachment Circuit Rx Fault
Attachment Circuit Tx Fault
PSN Rx Fault
PSN Tx Fault
VCCV-BFD Status Current status of the VCCV-BFD
verification mechanism:
• Init – the mechanism in initializing
• Up – the mechanism is working
and detecting connection faults
• Down / control-detection-time-
expired
• Down / neighbor-signaled-session
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-82 Monitoring the Multiservice over PSN Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Out PW Label The PW label that is used in the
outbound direction. Relevant only if
the PW subtype is clock recovery and
if the provisioning mode is set to
Manual.
1–4095 if the PSN type is
UDPoIP
16–1048575 for any other
PSN type
Out Tunnel Label Index of the egress tunnel definition
for this PW. A value of 0 means that
the tunnel label is not used.
In PW Label The PW label that is used in the
inbound direction.
In Tunnel Label Index of the ingress tunnel definition
for this PW. A value of 0 means that
the tunnel label is not used.
Max Cells (Actual) Number of cells per ATM PW
Displaying Pseudowire Connection Statistics
Viewing Pseudowire Current Statistics
To view the PW current statistics:
1. From ATM PW Statistics Table, select the PW and select Current.
2. Click Statistics.
The ATM PW Current Packets Statistics window is displayed.
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the Multiservice over PSN Performance 5-83
Figure 4-53. ATM PW Current Packets Statistics
Table 4-42. ATM PW Current Packets Statistics
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
PW Number Number of the Pseudowire connection that is
associated with the recovered clock ID.
1 to Maximum Number of
Entries
PW Name Name of the Pseudowire connection Alphanumeric
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-84 Monitoring the Multiservice over PSN Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
PW Type Type of the pseudowire connection ATM VP 1 to 1
ATM VC 1 to 1
ATM VP N to 1
ATM VC N to 1
AAL5-SDU
SAToP
Basic CES PSN
PSN Type The type of packet-switched network on which
this PW is established.
MPLS
UDP over IP
MPLS over IP
MPLS over GRE
Default:MPLS over IP
Time Elapsed (sec) Elapsed time (in seconds) since the beginning
of the current interval.
Rx Packets Number of good clock packets that have been
received
Numerical
Rx Congestion
Dropped
Number of frames that were dropped due to
lack of buffers.
This may be caused by attempting to send
traffic towards the Ethernet connection at a
rate higher than the ATM transmission rate.
Numerical
Tx Packets Number of good clock packets that have been
transmitted
Numerical
Tx Congestion
Dropped
Number of packets dropped due to congestion
on the transmit direction (toward the PSN)
Numerical
Tx Timeout Number of packets transmitted to the
Ethernet port because of timeout expiration
Numerical
Packets Loss Event Number of Losses of frame/frames, which was
identified by a gap in the sequence number
and not classified as a “misorder”
Numerical
MisOrder Dropped
Packets
Number of packets that were dropped (not
fixed) by the reordering mechanism.
Numerical
Reordered Packets Number of packets that were received later
than expected and were fixed by the
reordering mechanism
Numerical
3. From TDM PW Statistics Table, select the PW and select Current.
4. Click Statistics.
The TDM PW Current Packets Statistics window is displayed.
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the Multiservice over PSN Performance 5-85
Figure 4-54. TDM PW Current Statistics Dialog Box
Table 4-43. TDM PW Current Statistics
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
PW Number Number of the Pseudowire connection that is
associated with the recovered clock ID.
1 to Maximum Number of
Entries
PW Name Name of the Pseudowire connection Alphanumeric
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-86 Monitoring the Multiservice over PSN Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
PW Type Type of the pseudowire connection ATM VP 1 to 1
ATM VC 1 to 1
ATM VP N to 1
ATM VC N to 1
AAL5-SDU
SAToP
Basic CES PSN
PSN Type The type of packet-switched network on which
this PW is established.
MPLS
UDP over IP
MPLS over IP
MPLS over GRE
Default:MPLS over IP
Time Elapsed (sec) Elapsed time (in seconds) since the beginning of
the current interval.
Rx Packets Number of good clock packets that have been
received
Numerical
Tx Packets Number of good clock packets that have been
transmitted
Numerical
Missing Packets (%) Percentage of lost packets – not including
misordered dropped packets.
Misorder Dropped
Packets
Number of packets that were dropped (not fixed)
by the reordering mechanism.
Numerical
Reordered Packets Number of packets that were received later than
expected and were fixed by the reordering
mechanism
Numerical
Malformed Packets Number of packets that were detected by a
mismatch between the expected packet size and
the actual packet size.
Numerical
Jitter Buffer
Underrun
Number of times the jitter buffer was in underrun
state.
In normal operation, an underrun event occurs
when the TDM outgoing stream rate (out of the
buffer) is higher than the PSN incoming stream
rate (into the buffer).
Numerical
Viewing Pseudowire Intervals Statistics
ACE-3105, ACE-3205 collects statistics per physical port and per connection for 15-minute intervals. Statistics for the last 6 hours are stored in the device and can be retrieved at the network management station.
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the Multiservice over PSN Performance 5-87
To view the PW intervals statistics:
1. From ATM PW Statistics Table, select the PW and select Intervals.
2. Click Statistics.
The ATM PW Intervals Packets Statistics window is displayed.
Figure 4-55. ATM PW Interval Statistics Dialog Box
Table 4-44. ATM PW Interval Statistics
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
PW Number Number of the Pseudowire connection that is
associated with the recovered clock ID.
1 to Maximum Number of
Entries
PW Name Name of the Pseudowire connection Alphanumeric
PW Type Type of the Pseudowire connection ATM VP 1 to 1
ATM VC 1 to 1
ATM VP N to 1
ATM VC N to 1
AAL5-SDU
SAToP
Basic CES PSN
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-88 Monitoring the Multiservice over PSN Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
PSN Type The type of packet-switched network on which
this PW is established.
MPLS
UDP over IP
MPLS over IP
MPLS over GRE
Default:MPLS over IP
Number of
Intervals
The number of valid intervals that are saved Numerical
Int No. The interval number to be displayed Numerical
From (hh:mm) Start time of the interval Time
To (hh:mm) End time of the interval Time
Rx Packets Number of good clock packets that have been
received
Numerical
Rx Congestion
Dropped
Number of frames that were dropped due to
lack of buffers.
This may be caused by attempting to send
traffic towards the Ethernet connection at a
rate higher than the ATM transmission rate.
Numerical
Tx Packets Number of good clock packets that have been
transmitted
Numerical
Tx Congestion
Dropped
Number of packets dropped due to congestion
on the transmit direction (toward the PSN)
Numerical
Tx Timeout Number of packets transmitted to the Ethernet
port because of timeout expiration
Numerical
Packets Loss Event Number of Losses of frame/frames, which was
identified by a gap in the sequence number and
not classified as a misorder
Numerical
Misorder Dropped
Packets
Number of packets that were dropped (not
fixed) by the reordering mechanism.
Numerical
Reordered Packets Number of packets that were received later than
expected and were fixed by the reordering
mechanism
Numerical
3. From TDM PW Statistics Table, select the PW and select Intervals.
4. Click Statistics.
The TDM PW Intervals Packets Statistics window is displayed.
User's Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management
RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Monitoring the Multiservice over PSN Performance 5-89
Figure 4-56. TDM PW Interval Statistics Dialog Box
Table 4-45. TDM PW Interval Statistics
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
PW Number Number of the Pseudowire connection that is
associated with the recovered clock ID.
1 to Maximum Number of
Entries
PW Name Name of the Pseudowire connection Alphanumeric
PW Type Type of the Pseudowire connection ATM VP 1 to 1
ATM VC 1 to 1
ATM VP N to 1
ATM VC N to 1
AAL5-SDU
SAToP
Basic CES PSN
PSN Type The type of packet-switched network on
which this PW is established.
MPLS
UDP over IP
MPLS over IP
MPLS over GRE
Default:MPLS over IP
Number of
Intervals
The number of valid intervals that are saved Numerical
Chapter 5 Performance Management User's Manual
5-90 Monitoring the Multiservice over PSN Performance RADview-NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO)
Int No. The interval number to be displayed Numerical
From (hh:mm) Start time of the interval Time
To (hh:mm) End time of the interval Time
Rx Packets Number of good clock packets that have
been received
Numerical
Tx Packets Number of good clock packets that have
been transmitted
Numerical
Missing Packets
(%)
Percentage of lost packets – not including
misordered dropped packets.
Misorder Dropped
Packets
Number of packets that were dropped (not
fixed) by the reordering mechanism.
Numerical
Reordered Packets Number of packets that were received later
than expected and were fixed by the
reordering mechanism
Numerical
Malformed
Packets
Number of packets that were detected by a
mismatch between the expected packet size
and the actual packet size.
Numerical
Jitter Buffer Under
Run
Number of times the jitter buffer was in
underrun state.
In normal operation, an underrun event
occurs when the TDM outgoing stream rate
(out of the buffer) is higher than the PSN
incoming stream rate (into the buffer).
Numerical
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Changing User Names 6-1
Chapter 6
Security Management RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 provides for secure access at the menu, dialog box, and function (add, change, delete, view) levels.
This chapter describes:
• Adding Users
• Changing User Names
• Changing Passwords
• Setting Management Access Authorization
• Enabling SNMPv3.
6.1 Adding Users
Part of security management is creating and adding users in the system. Each user has to have a username and a password to be identified when logging in. Each user is normally assigned a set of permissions, as follows:
• Administrator – Unlimited access to all operations including User Administration
• Operator – Full Write mode and access to all except for User/System Administration (read only)
• Technician – Limited access to configuration operations and read-only mode for Event Browser
• Monitor – Read-only mode for configuration operations, and has no access to other applications.
For details about how to add users, see Chapter 4, RADview Functions Security in the RADview-EMS/NGN (PC/Unix) system manual.
6.2 Changing User Names
A unique username identifies the user when accessing a multi-user system. A user name is assigned to the user and can later be changed.
For details on how to change a user name, see Chapter 4 in the RADview-EMS/NGN (PC/Unix) system manual.
Chapter 6 Security Management User's Manual
6-2 Setting Management Access Authorization ACE-3100, ACE-3200
6.3 Changing Passwords
A password together with a corresponding username is necessary in order to gain access to the system. You can personalize and change your login password to easily remember it. To be able to change to a new password, you have to know the old one for verification purposes. Only letters and numbers are valid password characters.
For details on how to change passwords in RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200, see Chapter 4 in the RADview-EMS/NGN (PC/Unix) system documentation.
6.4 Setting Management Access Authorization
Using the EMS Security Console
The EMS Admin Console hosts the EMS administration tools, which are called consoles. The EMS Security Console is a tool that enables users with security administrative rights to do the following:
• View and manage the EMS Security profiles in a graphical interface
• Create and edit security profiles
• Manage user accounts.
Figure 6-1. EMS Admin Console – EMS Security Administrator
User's Manual Chapter 6 Security Management
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Setting Management Access Authorization 6-3
The main application window is split into three parts:
• Left upper side – A tree of the security profiles
• Right upper side – A list of users that share the selected profile
• Bottom – A list of all of the users.
The operations specific to the EMS Security Administrator are:
• Profile – Add, edit, and remove profiles
• Users – Add, edit, and remove users
• Login – View the list of users who are currently logged in and log out a user
• Options – Configure password policies, user’s account policies, and user’s audit policies.
For a complete description, see the RADview-EMS/NGN (PC/Unix) User’s Manual.
Setting a Security Profile
A profile is a hierarchical tree that is comprised of permissions (actions).
Each action that is subject to security has a function label for a specific operation. A profile is composed of labels.
Each function label has a predefined place in the profile tree structure, according to the category in which it is assigned, that is, permissions for an agent, a range, configuration, and so forth.
A label can have different permission rights:
• Write (which includes Read)
• Read
• Not Available.
Setting Permissions
Figure 6-2 shows the available permissions on the right pane and the individual permissions that have been assigned to a profile on the left pane.
The types of profiles are:
• Mandatory – Administrator, Operator, Technician, and Monitor
Mandatory profiles cannot be edited or deleted.
• User-defined – Created from scratch or derived from an existing profile.
A user is assigned only one role (profile); however, a role (profile) can be assigned to many users.
Note
Chapter 6 Security Management User's Manual
6-4 Enabling SNMPv3 ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 6-2. Permission Hierarchy
The hierarchical permission tree shows:
• Available permissions that have been loaded (on the right pane)
• Group permissions
• Individual permissions that have been assigned (and can be modified) for the new profile (on the left pane)
• Permissions that have been modified for a range of IP addresses (on the left pane)
• Permissions that have been modified for a specific slot or port instance (on the left pane).
6.5 Enabling SNMPv3
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 supports SNMP version 3, providing secure access to the device by authenticating and encrypting packets transmitted over the network.
Enabling SNMPv3 is recommended for greater management access and security.
For a detailed explanation on enabling the SNMPv3, refer to the RADview-EMS/NGN system manual, or to Chapter 4 of the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Installation and Operation Manual.
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Handling Alarms and Faults 7-1
Chapter 7
Fault Management This chapter describes the various RADview ACE-3100, ACE-3200 fault management options and comprises:
• Handling Alarms and Faults
• Performing Diagnostic Tests
• Troubleshooting
• Frequently Asked Questions
• Technical Support.
7.1 Handling Alarms and Faults
This section explains how to monitor the status of objects in ACE-3100, ACE-3200.
Interpreting Icon Colors
The color of the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 icon on the SNMPc map is based on polling and SNMP events as follows:
Green icon – The SNMP connectivity between the Agent and the NMS is good
Red icon – A timeout or a failed interaction with the agent occurred
Magenta icon – Indication of received traps
Yellow frame – Minor alarm is present
Green frame – No alarms
Red frame – A major alarm is present
Dark Blue frame – A warning alarm is present
Orange frame – A major alarm is present.
The color of the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 icon on the HPOV map is based on polling and SNMP events as follows:
Yellow – A minor alarm is present
Green – No alarms
Red – A timeout or a failed interaction with the agent occurred
Cyan – A warning alarm is present
Chapter 7 Fault Management User's Manual
7-2 Handling Alarms and Faults RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Orange – A major alarm is present.
Viewing All Active Alarms
The All Active Alarms option enables you to view all the active alarms.
To view all the active alarms:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame appears around the device image.
2. From the Fault menu, select All Active Alarms.
Figure 7-1. System Level Fault Menu
The All Active Alarms List dialog box appears.
Figure 7-2. All Active Alarms List Dialog Box
User's Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Handling Alarms and Faults 7-3
Table 7-1. Active Alarms List – Buttons and Parameters
Parameter / Button Description Possible Values
Port Filter for displaying the ports. All (default)
System (--)
ETH1, ETH2
ATM-155 1, ATM-155 2
E1 1–N,
T1 1–N,
J1 1–N
IMA Group 1–N
Port Displays the type and number of the
selected ports:
System (--)
ETH1, ETH2
ATM-155 1, ATM-155 2
E1 1–N,
T1 1–N,
J1 1–N
IMA Group 1–N
VPI Virtual Path Identifier.
VCI Virtual Channel Identifier.
Alarm See
[Apply Filter] Displays relevant alarms according to
the current filter configuration.
To clear the alarm list and display only
the alarms that are relevant to a
selected port, select the required port
and then click the <Apply Filter>
button.
Applied
Configured
[Print] Click <Print> to print the All Active
Alarm List.
[Save to File] Allows you to save the All Active Alarms
List to a file.
Click <Save to File> and specify the
destination name and directory.
[Close] Click <Close> to close the All Active
Alarm List.
[Refresh] Click <Refresh> to update the All Active
Alarm List with current data.
Chapter 7 Fault Management User's Manual
7-4 Handling Alarms and Faults RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Table 7-2. Alarm Types
Type of Alarm Description Possible Values
System Alarm Displays system-level alarms Currently there is no
alarm indication at the
system level
ETH Alarm Alarm indication for ETH1 and ETH2.
The operating or administrative
status of the ETH link is down.
Link Down
ATM-155 and E1/T1
Physical Alarm
Physical alarm indication for all the
device ports
STM-1 and E1/T1:
LOS, LOF, Line AIS, Line
RDI, and Line FEBE.
STM-1 only:
LOP, Path AIS, SLM, LCD,
Path RDI, Section BIP,
Line BIP, Path BIP, and
Path FEBE
VP Alarm Virtual Path Alarms
VP AIS, VP LOSS of
Continuity, VP RDI
Reception, VP Loopback
Failure
Port Alarm
Type and number of
active port
ATM-155 1, ATM-155 2
E1 1–16
T1 1–16
J1 1–16
IMA Group 1–16
VPI Alarm Virtual Path Identifier.
When irrelevant, the value in this field
is ‘—’
0–255
VCI Alarm Virtual Channel Identifier.
When irrelevant, the value in this field
is ‘—’
32–65535
VC Alarm VC AIS, VC LOSS of
Continuity, VC RDI
Reception, VC Loopback
Failure
User's Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Handling Alarms and Faults 7-5
Masking Alarm Traps
The alarm traps can be configured using masks, without traps, using all traps, or only specific traps.
To set alarm traps:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
2. A light blue frame appears around the device image.
3. From the Options menu, select Manager list.
The Manager IP address dialog appears.
Figure 7-3. Manager IP Address Dialog Box
4. Select the IP address and click Change.
The Change Manager dialog box appears.
Figure 7-4. Change Manager Dialog Box
5. Click Mask Traps.
The Mask Traps dialog box appears.
6. Check the Manual radio button to enable criteria selection.
Chapter 7 Fault Management User's Manual
7-6 Handling Alarms and Faults RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 7-5. Mask Traps Dialog Box
The options in this window are disabled unless the Manual is selected.
Table 7-3. Mask Traps Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values
Masking Mode
Group of three option
buttons:
• All – All the traps are
masked.
• None – None of the
traps are masked.
• Manual – Enabling or
disabling traps is
performed manually.
All
None
Manual
Note
User's Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Handling Alarms and Faults 7-7
Parameter Description Possible Values
Cold Start This trap indicates that the
Agent is re-initializing itself
in such a way that the
Agent’s configuration may
be altered.
Activated
Not activated
Agent Status Changed The
agnStatusChangeTrap trap
is sent whenever there is a
change in the state of the
device. This trap is also
used for coloring the Agent
node on the HPOV map.
Activated
Not activated
TFTP Status Changed The tftpStatusChangeTrap
trap is sent whenever a
TFTP session is opened
between the Agent and the
NMS. Masking it, fails the
operation of TFTP
applications.
Activated
Not activated
Authentication Failure This trap is sent when an
SNMP request is made
under a community name
that does not match the
community name in the
Agent.
Activated
Not activated
Power Supply Failure The
agnPowerFailureTrap trap is
sent to indicate a power
failure state.
It is relevant only to a
device with two PSUs, e.g.,
the device can not send a
trap before one PSU is shut
down, only upon a status
change while the other PSU
is up.
Activated
Not activated
Fan Failure The agnFanFailureTrap trap
is sent to indicate a fan
failure/recovery.
Activated
Not activated
Clock Source State Change Three possible clock states:
A – Master/Primary clock
B –Fallback/Secondary
C – Internal oscillator
Activated
Not activated
Chapter 7 Fault Management User's Manual
7-8 Handling Alarms and Faults RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
Recovered Clock State This option is available only
if the clock recovery
hardware component and
the proper software license
are installed.
Activated
Not activated
Agent Uploaded Data The Agent Uploaded Data
trap.
Activated
Not activated
Self-Test Result Change The Self-Test Result Change
trap.
Activated
Not activated
Redundancy Active Port The Redundancy Active Port
trap.
Activated
Not activated
APS Active Port The APS Active Port trap. Activated
Not activated
License Update The license update status
alarm trap. This option is
available only if the proper
software license is
installed.
Activated
Not activated
Recovered Clock Frequency
Alarm
This option is available only
if the clock recovery
hardware component and
the proper software license
are installed.
Activated
Not activated
Port Status Changed The prtStatusChangeTrap
trap is sent whenever the
SFP port is taken out from
the device or inserted.
Activated
Not activated
LCD The atmAceAlarmLCD trap
is sent to indicate a Loss of
Cell Delineation condition.
Activated
Not activated
Link Up/Down • LinkDown – Indicates
that the operation
status of the ETH link is
down.
• LinkUp – Indicates that
the operation status of
the ETH link is up.
Activated
Not activated
SLM The atmAceAlarmSLM trap
is sent to indicate a Signal
Line Mismatch condition
Activated
Not activated
User's Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Handling Alarms and Faults 7-9
Parameter Description Possible Values
LOS The atmAceAlarmLOS trap is
sent when there is a
condition indicating that
the receiving equipment
has lost the received signal.
Activated
Not activated
LOP The atmAceAlarmSLM trap
is sent to indicate a
condition that the receiver
equipment has lost the
pointer to the start of cell
in the payload.
Activated
Not activated
LOF The atmAceAlarmLOF trap
is sent when there is a
condition indicating that
the receiving equipment
has lost frame delineation.
Activated
Not activated
Line AIS The atmAceAlarmLineAIS
trap is sent by a device
when it detects an error
condition or receives an
error condition from
another unit in the
transmission path.
Activated
Not activated
Path AIS The atmAceAlarmPathAIS
trap is sent by a device
when it detects an error
condition or receives an
error condition from
another unit in the
transmission path.
Activated
Not activated
Line RDI The atmAceAlarmLineRDI
trap is sent to indicate a
Remote Line Defect
Indication condition.
Activated
Not activated
Path RDI The atmAceAlarmPathRDI
trap is sent to indicate a
Remote Path Defect
Indication condition.
Activated
Not activated
Chapter 7 Fault Management User's Manual
7-10 Handling Alarms and Faults RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
Section BIP The atmAceAlarmSectionBIP
trap is sent to indicate an
error performance of the
link at the Section layer.
Bit Interleaved Parity is a
method used at the
Physical layer to monitor
the error performance of
the link. A check bit is sent
in the link overhead
covering the previous block
or frame.
Activated
Not activated
Line BIP The atmAceAlarmLineBIP
trap is sent to indicate an
error performance of the
link at the Line layer.
Activated
Not activated
`Path BIP The atmAceAlarmPathBIP
trap is sent to indicate an
error performance of the
link at the Path layer.
Activated
Not activated
Line FEBE The atmAceAlarmLineFEBE
trap is sent to indicate that
a bit error(s) has been
detected at the Physical
layer at the far-end of the
link.
This is used to monitor bit
error performance of the
link in the Line layer.
Activated
Not activated
Path FEBE The atmAceAlarmPathFEBE
trap is sent to indicate that
a bit error(s) has been
detected at the Physical
layer at the far-end of the
link.
This is used to monitor bit
error performance of the
link in the Path layer.
Activated
Not activated
PW Up/Down PseudoWire connection
status
Activated
Not activated
BFD Session Up/Down BFD Session status Activated
Not activated
LDP Session Up/Down LDP Session status Activated
Not activated
User's Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Handling Alarms and Faults 7-11
Parameter Description Possible Values
ADSL Rate Changed Follow up on the speed at
which traffic passes
through the ADSL links.
Activated
Not activated
IMA Group Status Changed The
AtmImaGroupStatusChange
Trap trap is sent if an IMA
group status changed.
Activated
Not activated
VP Continuity Loss The
AtmAceAlarmVpContinuityL
oss trap is sent to indicate
a Loss of continuity on a VP
Connection.
Activated
Not activated
VC Continuity Loss The
AtmAceAlarmVcContinuityLo
ss trap is sent to indicate a
Loss of continuity on a VC
Connection.
Activated
Not activated
VP AIS Reception The
AtmAceAlarmVpAISReceptio
n trap is sent to indicate
AIS Reception on a VP
Connection.
Activated
Not activated
VC AIS Reception The
AtmAceAlarmVcAISReceptio
n trap is sent to indicate
AIS Reception on a VC
Connection.
Activated
Not activated
VP RDI Reception The
AtmAceAlarmVpRDIReceptio
n trap is sent to indicate
RDI Reception on a VP
Connection.
Activated
Not activated
VC RDI Reception The
AtmAceAlarmVcRDIReceptio
n trap is sent to indicate
RDI Reception on a VC
Connection.
Activated
Not activated
VP Loopback Failure The
AtmAceAlarmVpLoopback
trap is sent to indicate an
error resulting from an OAM
Loopback failure in the VP
layer.
Activated
Not activated
Chapter 7 Fault Management User's Manual
7-12 Handling Alarms and Faults RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values
VC Loopback Failure The
AtmAceAlarmVcLoopback
trap is sent to indicate an
error resulting from an OAM
Loopback failure in the VC
layer.
Activated
Not activated
Viewing the History Log
The history log records the details of all system events. The System Log Buffer dialog box displays 100 log entries per page, and the buffer itself can hold up to 2048 log entries.
Setting the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 device to its default configuration does not affect the history log. The history log entries are kept even after a device reset operation, and can only be deleted manually.
To display the history log:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame appears around the device image.
2. From the Fault menu, select History Log.
3. Click List.
The System Log Buffer dialog box appears displaying the first page (100 entries) of the most recent history log. By default, more recent events appear on the top of the list (unless you sort the list according to a column category).
User's Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Handling Alarms and Faults 7-13
Figure 7-6. System Log Buffer Dialog Box
The displayed Date & Time of each log entry is of the Agent date and time. If the NMS station and the Agent clock are not synchronized, events in the log file may have a certain date and time, and the same event in the intervals statistics are displayed under the local station’s date and time.
Therefore, it is recommended to synchronize the NMS clock with the Agent clock using the Net Date & Time shell application (for more information, refer to the RADview-EMS/NGN User’s Guide).
Table 7-4. System Log Buffer – Buttons and Parameters
Parameter / Button
Description Possible Values
No. Sequential number of each log entry. The most
recent entry is 1.
The log buffer can hold up to 2048 entries. When
the log buffer is full and a new event is recorded,
the oldest event is dropped.
1–2048
Date & Time The date and time values for the received event.
Event
Description
The description of the received event
[Print…] Click <Print> to print the History Log.
[Save to File…] Click <Save to File> to save the History Log.
Note
Chapter 7 Fault Management User's Manual
7-14 Handling Alarms and Faults RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
[Next] Click <Next> to display the next page of 100
entries. This button is disabled after NMS has
displayed the last page.
[Start From…] Click <Start From> to open a dialog box which
allows you to start viewing the log from a specific
log entry.
Fill-in the required log entry number, and then click
<Select>.
You can obtain the next entries by clicking <Next>.
Any alarm present in
the log
[Close] Click <Close> to close the System Log Buffer dialog
box.
[Refresh] Click <Refresh> to update the history log display.
Clearing the History Log
To clear the history log:
1. From the History Log submenu, select Clear.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
Figure 7-7. History Log Clear Confirmation
2. Click <OK> to clear all the entries from the log buffer.
Once deleted, log entries cannot be restored. It is therefore recommended to save the current history log to a file (using <Save to File> in the System Log Buffer dialog box) prior to the deletion. Clicking <Cancel> on the confirmation message cancels the deletion.
List of Alarm Traps
The following alarm traps that are implemented in ACE-3100, ACE-3200:
Table 7-5. Alarm Traps
Number Trap Name
1. Cold Start
Note
User's Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Handling Alarms and Faults 7-15
Number Trap Name
2. Agent Status Changed
3. TFTP status changed
4. Authentication failure
5. Power failure
6. Fan failure
7. Port status change – for SFP
8. Link down – for ETH ports only
9. Link up – for ETH ports only
10. Loss Of Signal (LOS Physical Layer)*
11. Loss Of Frame (LOF Physical Layer)*
12. Loss Of ATM Cell Delineation (LCD ATM Layer)*
13. Signal Label Mismatch (SLM Physical Layer)*
14. Loss Of Pointer (LOP Physical Layer)* – for ATM-155 ports only
15. Alarm Indication Signal Received (AIS Line Physical Layer)*
16. Alarm Indication Signal Received (AIS Path Physical Layer)*
17. Remote Defect Indication Received (RDI Line Physical Layer)*
18. Remote Defect Indication Received (RDI Path Physical Layer)*
19. Bit Interleaved Parity Error (BIP Section Physical Layer)* – for ATM-155 ports only
20. Bit Interleaved Parity Error (BIP Line Physical Layer)* – for ATM-155 ports only
21. Bit Interleaved Parity Error (BIP Path Physical Layer)* – for ATM-155 ports only
22. Far End Block Error (FEBE Line Physical Layer)* – for ATM-155 ports only
23. Far End Block Error (FEBE Path Physical Layer)* – for ATM-155 ports only
24. VP loopback failed (Fault Management in ATM layer)*
25. VP continuity loss (Fault Management in ATM layer)*
26. VP AIS Alarm Received (Fault Management in ATM layer)*
27. VP RDI Received (Fault Management in ATM layer)*
28. VC loopback failed (Fault Management in ATM layer)*
29. VC continuity loss (Fault Management in ATM layer)*
30. VC AIS Alarm Received (Fault Management in ATM layer)*
31. VC RDI Received (Fault Management in ATM layer)*
32. IMA Group Status Change
* Also implemented as an active alarm.
Note
Chapter 7 Fault Management User's Manual
7-16 Performing Diagnostic Tests RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
7.2 Performing Diagnostic Tests
You can perform various diagnostic tests, as described in the following sections:
• Viewing the Self-Test Results
• Setting the Loopback Timeout.
The system level diagnostic features include the options to suspend loopbacks for a defined period, and to perform cell transmission tests.
Viewing the Self-Test Results
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 performs a self-test upon power-up, and its results can be displayed in the Self-Test Results dialog box.
To access the Self-Test Results screen:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame surrounds the device image.
2. On the main menu, click Diagnostics.
The Diagnostics menu appears.
Figure 7-8. System Level Diagnostics Menu
3. From the Diagnostics menu, select Self-Test Results.
The self-test results are displayed.
User's Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Performing Diagnostic Tests 7-17
Figure 7-9. Self-Test Results Dialog Box
Table 7-6. Self-Test Results Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (R/O)
Module The system module that underwent a self-test.
Result The result of the self-test:
• "Passed" - The test has passed successfully (no
error/malfunction has been found).
• "Failed" - The test has failed (an
error/malfunction has been found).
Passed
Failed
To close the Self-Test Results dialog box:
• In the Self-Test Results dialog box (see Figure 7-9), click <Close>.
The Self-Test Results dialog box closes.
To update the self-test results with current data:
• In the Self-Test Results dialog box (see Figure 7-9), click <Refresh>.
Chapter 7 Fault Management User's Manual
7-18 Performing Diagnostic Tests RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
The self-test results display is updated.
Setting the Loopback Timeout
The system level diagnostic features include the option to suspend loopbacks for a defined period.
A loopback test is a diagnostic procedure during which a signal is transmitted towards the network and then returned to the initiating device.
The objective of the loopback test is to determine whether the initiating device has any internal faults, or to identify a failing node in a network.
This Loopback menu entry is available even when there is no communication with the Agent. If the test causes a disconnection, you can terminate it at any time.
To set the loopback operation timeout:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame appears around the device image.
2. On the main menu, click Diagnostics.
Figure 7-10. System Level Diagnostics Menu
3. Select Loopback Timeout…
Figure 7-11. Loopback Timeout Dialog Box
4. Enter the required minutes value (see Table 7-7), and click <Set>.
RADview validates the entered value and sets the timeout as defined.
If the entered timeout value is not within the acceptable range, an error message is displayed and the previous value is kept.
Table 7-7. Loopback Timeout Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW)
Loopback Timeout
(min.)
Enter the number of minutes after which
the loopback should be disabled.
0–300
Note
User's Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Performing Diagnostic Tests 7-19
Performing Loopback Diagnostics
The physical loopback includes a configurable timeout mechanism to terminate the loopback operation upon expiry of the assigned period.
To perform a loopback diagnostics test:
1. In the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image, double-click an E1/T1 port.
The E1/T1 Port dialog box appears (see Figure 3-33).
2. In the port’s graphic image dialog box, select the physical layer (E1/T1) rectangle.
A light blue frame appears around the physical layer and the Diagnostics menu becomes enabled.
3. From the Diagnostics menu, select Loopback.
Figure 7-12. E1/T1 Diagnostics Menu
Figure 7-13. Port Loopback State Dialog Box
4. Select the required loopback state (see Table 7-8), and click <Set>.
Table 7-8. Port Loopback State Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO/RW)
Port Port type and number E1 1–16
T1 1–16
(Read Only)
Mode The port’s operating mode UNI
IMA Link
CES
(Read Only)
Chapter 7 Fault Management User's Manual
7-20 Performing Diagnostic Tests RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RO/RW)
Current Loopback Indicates the currently running state of
loopback test:
• Disabled – Loopback state disabled
• Internal – Sometimes referred to as local
loop. All transmitted data is also looped
back toward the receive port.
• External – Sometimes referred as remote
or line loop. The received data and clock
are also looped back toward the transmit
port.
Disabled
Internal
External
(Read Only)
New Loopback Select the required loopback state.
This field does not appear if APS is active.
Disabled
Internal
External
(Read/Write)
While the loopback is being performed on the Agent:
• The Agent does not respond to Get requests.
• In the case of External Loopback, the Agent responds to Set requests. Therefore, you can open this dialog box (even if the Agent is disconnected from the NMS) and stop or change the loopback state.
• In the case of Internal Loopback, the Agent is disconnected from the NMS. Therefore, you have to wait until the current loopback ends.
Performing a Cell Test
In a cell test, either a predefined user cell or an OAM cell is sent towards the user’s side or the network side.
To perform a cell test:
1. Click the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 graphic device image.
A light blue frame appears around the device image.
2. From the Diagnostics menu (see Figure 7-10), select Cell Test.
User's Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Performing Diagnostic Tests 7-21
Figure 7-14. Cell Test Dialog Box
3. Enter the required values in the editable fields (see Table 7-9), and click <Send>.
RADview validates the cell parameters. Once validated, the cell test is carried out according to the defined parameters.
Table 7-9. Cell Test Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW)
Port The port for which the cell test is to be
performed
ATM-155 1–2
E1/T1 1–16
IMA Group 1–N
VPI Virtual Path Identifier 0–255 UNI
0–4095 NNI
VCI Virtual Channel Identifier 0–65535
(Default = 32)
PTI Payload Type Identifier User cell
OAM assignment
OAM end-to-end
CLP Cell Loss Priority CLP 0
CLP 1
OAM Functions This field is enabled only when PTI has
been defined as either OAM Segment or
OAM end-to-end
AIS
RDI
CC
Chapter 7 Fault Management User's Manual
7-22 Troubleshooting RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW)
Payload This field is enabled only when PTI has
been defined as user cell
00–FF (hexadecimal)
Number of Cells Number of individual cells to be sent in
this test
1–1000
RADview performs the following cell test validations:
• If the VCI value is 3 or 4, the following message is displayed: "PTI is irrelevant when VCI value is 3 or 4". In addition, the Payload parameter cannot be configured when the VCI value is 3 or 4.
• Checks whether the VPI, VCI, Payload and Number of Cells values are out of range. If any of these parameters is out of range, an appropriate error message that specifies the proper range is displayed on the status bar.
• When <Send> is clicked, if the APS is active and the selected port for the Cell Test is currently used as Working Port #2, an appropriate error message is displayed stating that the port selected cannot be used for a Cell Test when the APS is active.
7.3 Troubleshooting
Checking the On-Screen LEDs
The graphic device image in the ACE-3100, ACE-3200 window displays the LED indicators and their status in complete synchronization with the physical device LEDs.
Figure 7-15. LED indicators
The ACE-3100, ACE-3200 LED indicators are listed and explained in Chapter 2.
Corrective Measures
Depending on the reported alarm and its severity, change the unit configuration or check the integrity of ports, connections or standalone devices (such as switches, routers, etc.) that take part in the particular application.
User's Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Troubleshooting 7-23
Testing the Unit
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 can be tested in order to diagnose possible setbacks. This includes:
• Displaying Self-Test Results
• Performing Physical Loopback Diagnostics
• Performing a Cell Test
To access the unit's diagnostics options:
• From the main menu, select Diagnostics.
The Diagnostics menu is displayed.
Figure 7-16. Diagnostics Menu
Displaying Self-Test Results
ACE-3100, ACE-3200 performs a self-test upon power-up, and the results can displayed in the Self Test Results screen. In the results screen, "Pass" means that the test has passed successfully (no error/malfunction has been found), and "Fail" means that the test has failed (an error/malfunction has been found).
To view the unit's self-test results:
• From the Diagnostics menu, select Self Test Results.
The system performs a self-test and the results are displayed.
Chapter 7 Fault Management User's Manual
7-24 Troubleshooting RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Figure 7-17. Diagnostics – Self-Test Results
Performing Physical Loopback Diagnostics
The physical loopback includes a configurable timeout mechanism to terminate the loopback operation upon expiry of the assigned period.
To run loopback diagnostics:
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select Loopback Timeout.
A Loopback Timeout dialog is displayed, showing the preset timeout duration.
Figure 7-18. Diagnostics – Loopback Timeout Dialog
User's Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Troubleshooting 7-25
2. If necessary, you can change the timeout setting and click Set and then Refresh.
Performing a Cell Test
Cell tests send a predefined cell towards the ATM link.
To run a cell test:
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select Cell Test
A Cell Test dialog is displayed, showing the preset timeout duration.
Figure 7-19. Diagnostics – Cell Test Dialog
2. If necessary, you can change the settings and click Send Cell.
Table 7-10. Cell Test Parameters
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW)
Port The port for which the cell test is to be
performed
E1/T1 1–16
IMA Group 1-N
VPI Virtual Path Identifier 0-255 UNI
0-4095 NNI
VCI Virtual Channel Identifier 0–65535
(Default = 32)
PTI Payload Type Identifier User cell
OAM assignment
OAM end-to-end
CLP Cell Loss Priority CLP 0
Chapter 7 Fault Management User's Manual
7-26 Frequently Asked Questions RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Parameter Description Possible Values (RW)
CLP 1
OAM Functions This field is enabled only when PTI has
been defined as either OAM Segment or
OAM end-to-end
AIS
RDI
CC
7.4 Frequently Asked Questions
Q Does ACE-3100, ACE-3200 support ATM over PSN and ATM switching at the same time?
A Yes, both function types are supported by the unit and can be utilized simultaneously.
Q What kinds of AAL types does ACE-3100, ACE-3200 support over a packet-switched network?
A ACE-3100, ACE-3200 supports all AAL type (AAL1, AAL2, and AAL5) and transfers them via the PSN transparently.
Q What exactly is the timeout mechanism?
A When using the ATM cell concatenation mechanism, ACE-3100, ACE-3200 stores the data cells until the maximum number of concentrated cells is reached. TDM traffic, however, requires continuous delivery of data. Accordingly, ACE-3100, ACE-3200 uses the timeout mechanism to reduce the cell storage time before encapsulated data is sent towards the PSN. The timeout delay value can be set between 100 to 5,000,000 microseconds. The timer accuracy is +500 microseconds.
Q What is the ATM policer?
A ATM policing allows for monitoring of the network traffic for conformity with a traffic contract and if required, drops traffic to enforce compliance.
Q In packet-switched traffic, what triggers the sending of a packet?
A ACE-3100, ACE-3200 has several trigger of sending packet towards the PSN:
When reaching the maximum cells concatenation number
When the timeout timer has expired
When the end of AAL5 (SDU bit=1, configurable) is received.
Q How can an ATM VPs (virtual paths) be mapped to a pseudowire?
A Any ATM VP can be mapped to a PW using 1:1 mode (1 VP per PW) or N:1 mode (N VPs per PW).
User's Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 Frequently Asked Questions 7-27
Figure 7-20 demonstrates how VPs can be mapped to pseudowires in the 1:1 encapsulation mode (for more information, refer to Appendix E).
ACEPW1, PW2, PW3
ETHVP1, VP2, VP3
STM-1
33
22
11
PWVP
33
22
11
PWVPACE
ACE
PW=2ETH
ATMSTM-1
VP=1
12
VPPW
12
VPPW
ATMSTM-1
VP=1
11VPPW11
VPPW
ACE
ATMSTM-1
VP=1
13
VPPW
13
VPPW
PW=1
ETH
PW=3ETH
EthernetNetwork
Figure 7-20. VP 1:1 Mapping to PW
Q What kind of QoS does ACE-3100, ACE-3200 support over packet-switched networks?
A ACE-3100, ACE-3200 complies with 802.1p and 802.1q for L2 (VLAN), EXP bits of MPLS and for the ToS/DSCP of the IP layer. You can assign a QoS to each PW (configurable).
Q How can one calculate the required Ethernet bandwidth for a PW based on the ATM parameters?
A Bandwidth utilization depends on the ATM connection rate, mapping methods (VPoPSN or VCoPSN), network type (L2/MPLS or IP), VLAN existence and number of concatenated cells. A calculator that calculates the bandwidth based on these parameters can be obtained from Technical Support.
Q How can end-to-end OAM be maintained over a packet-switched network?
A ACE-3100, ACE-3200 transfers transparent End-to-End OAM over the PSN. You can set the Intermediate mode for the OAM Descriptor, in order to instruct ACE-3100, ACE-3200 to transparently forward the ATM OAM cells as user data over the PSN . For more information, refer to Chapter 4 and Appendix F.
Q How does the pseudowire connectivity check (VCCV-BFD) works?
A BFD control messages are generated by both the local and remote ACE units, on both directions of the pseudowire. When the local ACE unit does not receive control messages from the remote ACE unit during a number of transmission intervals, it declares that the PW on its receive (RX) direction is down. The PW then enters a defect forwarding state on the local ACE unit. In addition, the local ACE generates “Control-detection-time-expired" packets
Chapter 7 Fault Management User's Manual
7-28 Technical Support RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
towards the remote ACE, and the remote ACE replies with "neighbor-signal-session-down" packets. For more information, refer to Appendix F.
Q What is "Misorder" in the context of packet-switched traffic?
A In packet-switched traffic, some packets are not received according to their predefined sequence number. This condition is defined as misorder. Accordingly, to allow proper de-capsulation of ATM/TDM traffic, ACE-3100, ACE-3200 has a mechanism that fixes this condition by re-ordering the received packets correctly.
You can enable or disable the ordering mechanism, and also set the 'number of packets' window (0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 or 32 packets) in which ACE-3100, ACE-3200 tries to fix erroneous packet sequences (misorders). For more information, refer to Chapter 4.
7.5 Technical Support
Technical support for ACE-3100, ACE-3200 can be obtained from the local distributor from whom it was purchased.
For further information, please contact the RAD distributor nearest you or one of RAD's offices worldwide. This information can be found at RAD's Web site: http://www.rad.com/ (for offices location, click About RAD > Worldwide Offices ; for distributors location, click Where to Buy > End Users).
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 I-1
Index
—A—
ADSL links, 7-11 rate, 7-11
Agent, 7-7 node, 7-7 polling, 5-5 uploaded data trap, 7-8
Alarms, 7-8 buttons and parameters, 7-3 system, VP, VC, 7-4 traps list, 7-14 types, 7-4 viewing all active, 7-2, 7-5
APS active port, 7-8
trap, 7-8 ATM
PW current packets statistics, 5-82, 5-83 interval statistics, 5-87 intervals packets statistics, 5-87 statistics, 5-76, 5-77, 5-82, 5-87
ATM cross-connection adding, 3-78 configuring, 3-74 parameters, 3-76 removing, 3-80 validation, 3-79
ATM interface current statistics, 5-30 intervals statistics, 5-32
ATM-155 ports ATM layer
configuring, 3-30, 4-3 statistics, 5-22
SONET/SDH layer, configuring, 3-27
—B—
BFD sessions, 7-10
Bit Interleaved Parity, 7-10 Blocked FE, 3-72, 5-39 BTS, 4-1
—C—
CC direction, 3-60 CDVT, 3-53 Cell delineation
condition, 7-8 Cell test, 7-20 CES cross-connection
adding, 3-83 configuring, 3-80 parameters, 3-81, 3-82 removing, 3-87 selecting timeslots, 3-85 validation, 3-86
CES user current statistics, 5-68 intervals statistics, 5-70
Clock configuration, 3-35 source, 3-24
Commands, accessing port level, 2-6
Connectivity check diagram, 7-28
Continuity loss, 7-11
Control word enable/disable, 3-122 enable/disable, 3-116
Control-detection-time-expired, 7-27 Cross connections
ATM, 3-74 CES, 3-80
CTC, 3-71, 5-38 Current statistics, general description, 5-1
—D—
Date and time, 3-3 Net, 5-2 parameters, 3-4 synchronization, 5-2 validation, 3-4
Device image LED indicators, 2-8, 7-22
Device information, configuring, 3-1 Device level
configuration, 1-3 fault detection, 1-10 monitoring, 1-6
Diagnostics, 7-16 features, 7-16, 7-18 options, 7-23 procedure, 7-18 tests, 7-16, 7-18
Differences ACE-3100 and ACE-3200, 1-1
Differential delay, 3-72
—E—
E1 ports accessing configuration options, 3-22
Index User's Manual
I-2 RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
ATM over UNI mode, 3-61 configuring, 3-23 IMA links, 3-72 OAM cell generation, 3-61 statistics, 5-18
ETH link, 7-8
ETH ports configuration options, 3-19 configuring parameters, 3-21 viewing information, 3-20
Ethernet connection, 5-84, 5-88 interface, 5-76 tunneling, 5-76
—F—
Fail, 7-23 Failure status, 5-39 Fan failure/recovery, 7-7 Fault management, 7-1 FCAPS, 1-2 FM SES, 5-62 FM UAS, 5-62
—G—
Graphs appearance, 5-2 customization, 5-2 horizontal axis
current, 5-2 intervals, 5-2 time elapsed, 5-2
legend, 5-3 tooltips, 5-4 vertical axis, 5-2
Group far-end operation, 3-72, 5-39 near-end operation, 3-72, 5-39 operation, 3-71, 5-38
GUI port level, 2-6, 2-8
menu bar, 2-7 port layers, 2-7 Zoom In button, 2-7
system level, 2-5 device image, 2-5 menu bar, 2-5 poll agent button, 2-6 status bar, 2-6 system info button, 2-6 title bar, 2-5 tool bar, 2-6
using the, 2-4
—H—
Hardware options, 1-1
History log clearing, 7-14 viewing, 7-12
Host IP List parameters, 3-94 HPOV map, 7-7
icon colors, 7-1
—I—
Icons device, 2-3 element tree, 2-3 zoom, 2-3
IMA data-cell clock recovery, 3-71, 5-38 group, 7-11 version, 3-71, 5-38
far-end, 3-72, 5-39
invalid, 3-72 far-end unsupported, 5-39 near-end, 3-72, 5-39
invalid, 3-72 IMA group
adding, 3-64, 3-68 adding a link, 3-68 blocking, 3-69 current statistics, 5-40 displaying status, 3-69 intervals statistics, 5-42 removing, 3-68 removing a link, 3-68 selecting links, 3-67 statistics, 5-34 viewing status, 5-37
IMA groups links in, 3-64 parameters, 3-63 re-linking, 3-65 viewing, 3-62
IMA link status, 3-72 IMA version
far-end invalid, 5-39
near-end invalid, 5-39
Insufficient links, 3-71, 5-38 far-end, 3-72, 5-39
Internal oscillator, 7-7 Intervals statistics, general description, 5-1 Invalid IMA version
far-end, 3-72 near-end, 3-72
IP address of peers, 3-112
IP mask, 3-95 ITC, 3-71, 5-38
—J—
J1 ports accessing configuration options, 3-22 ATM over UNI mode, 3-61 configuring, 3-24 IMA links, 3-72 OAM cell generation, 3-61 statistics, 5-18
Jitter buffer underrun, 5-86
User's Manual Index
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 I-3
—L—
LDP sessions, 7-10
LED indicators, 2-8, 7-22 License packs, 1-2 Line code, 3-26 LOC, 5-62 Log buffer. See system log buffer Loopback, 7-11, 7-12, 7-16, 7-18
diagnostics, 7-19 Loopback timeout, 7-18 Losses
frame/frames, 5-88 rame/frames, 5-84
—M—
Malformed packets, 5-86 Management
station, 5-86 via ATM port, 2-2
Management station connecting to, 2-1
Manager adding, 3-13 changing the current, 3-15 IP, 3-14 list, 3-8, 3-13 validation, 3-14
Masking traps, 3-9 MBS, 3-53 MDCR, 3-53 Menu bar
port level, 2-7 system level, 2-5
Misorder, 3-111, 5-84, 5-86, 5-88, 5-90 setting, 3-111 term explanation, 7-28
MPLS applications, 3-100 traffic engineering, 3-100 VPNs, 3-100
Multiservice, 5-76
—N—
Neighbor-signal-session-down, 7-28 NMS
connecting to, 2-1 Node B, 4-1
—O—
OAM cell generation, 3-61 descriptors, 3-96
adding, 3-59 parameters, 3-58 removing, 3-61 table, 3-58 viewing, 3-58
loopback configuration, 3-57 parameters, 3-57 viewing, 3-57
Observed differential delay maximum, 5-40
OV severity, configuring, 3-16
—P—
Pass, 7-23 Passwords
changing, 6-2 Path
layer, 7-10 Peak cell rate, 3-53 Peers, 3-111 Performance monitoring, 5-1 Physical APS
details and statistics, 5-8 parameters, 3-32, 5-9 removing, 3-33 switch command, 3-34 table, 3-31
Physical layer, 7-10 Poll button, 5-1 Polling interval, 5-4 Polling the agent, 5-5 Port activation, 3-25 Port layer, selecting, 2-7 Port level
commands, accessing, 2-6 configuration, 1-4 fault detection, 1-10 monitoring, 1-8
Port type, 3-36 PPPoE parameters, 1-4 Protection monitoring, 5-8 PrtStatusChangeTrap trap, 7-8 Pseudowire, 5-79, See also PW
connection status, 7-10, See also PW connections, 3-112 mapping, 7-26
PSN, 5-76 peers
devices, 5-78, 5-79 performance, 5-76 Rx Fault, 5-81 stream rate, 5-86, 5-90 traffic
concentration, 5-76 Tx Fault, 5-81
PSN parameters, 3-109 general, 3-110 peers, 3-111 pseudowires, 3-112
PW, 5-80, 7-10, See also Pseudowire number, 3-114, 3-121 type, 3-115, 3-121
—R—
RDI reception, 7-11
Redundancy active port
trap, 7-8 Remote
line, 7-9 path, 7-9
Reset procedure, 3-128 Restore time, 3-26
Index User's Manual
I-4 RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200
Running time, 3-72, 5-40 Rx
number of links, 3-65 RDI, 5-62 Sensitivity, 3-24
—S—
SCR, 3-53 Self test, 7-23
results, 7-16, 7-17 change trap, 7-8
Service category, 3-51 SFP port, 7-8 Shaping parameters, 3-51 SNMP
request, 7-7 SNMPc map
device icon colors, 7-1 frame colors, 7-1
Software license, 1-2, 7-8
Software files swapping, 3-126, 3-127 viewing, 3-126
Start-up near-end, 5-39
Statistics ATM XC, 5-49 CES XC, 5-66 graph characteristics, 5-2 overview, 5-1 physical APS, 5-8 port level
ATM layer, 5-26 physical layer
ATM-155, 5-22
E1/T1/J1, 5-18 system level
ATM XC, 5-49 CES XC, 5-66 IMA groups, 5-34 polling interval, 5-4
types displayed, 5-1 Status messages
failure, 3-72 System
self-test results, 7-23 System information
configuring, 3-1 modifying, 3-2 parameters, 3-2
System level commands, 2-5 System log buffer
buttons and parameters, 7-13 clearing, 7-14 date and time, 7-13 dialog box, 7-12
—T—
T1 ports accessing configuration options, 3-22 ATM over UNI mode, 3-61
configuring, 3-24 IMA links, 3-72 OAM cell generation, 3-61 statistics, 5-18
TDM outgoing stream rate, 5-86, 5-90 PW
current Statistics, 5-85 interval
statistics, 5-89 PW Statistics, 5-84, 5-88
Telnet access, displaying status, 3-16 TFTP, 7-7
applications, 7-7 sessions, 7-7
Time elapsed, 5-27 Traffic descriptors, 3-95
adding, 3-54 configuring, 3-51 parameters, 3-49, 3-52 removing, 3-56 validation, 3-56 viewing, 3-31, 3-52
Transitional state, 5-38 Transmission
path, 7-9 rate
ATM, 5-84, 5-88 tests, 7-16
Transmit clock source, 3-24 Traps
masking, 3-9 Tunneling
Ethernet, 5-76 Tx
clock source, 3-65 number of links, 3-65 RDI, 5-62
Tx/Rx IMA ID, 3-71, 5-38
Typical configuration, 4-1
—U—
Uncorrected HEC cells, 5-34 User interface, 2-4 User name
changing, 6-1 Users
adding, 6-1
—V—
VC connection, 7-11
VC OAM current statistics, 5-58, 5-62 intervals statistics, 5-60, 5-64
VC user current statistics, 5-51, 5-54 intervals statistics, 5-52, 5-56
VCCV-BFD, 5-81 verification mechanism, 5-81
VCI, 3-95 VLAN
User's Manual Index
RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200 I-5
ID, 3-96 priority, 3-96 tagging, 3-96
VP connection, 7-11
VPI, 3-95
—W—
Web access, displaying status, 3-16
—X—
XCs ATM, 3-74 CES, 3-80
—Z—
Zoom into port, 2-7 Zoom to device, 2-4
Index User's Manual
I-6 RADview-EMS/NGN ACE-3100, ACE-3200